Siemens SIMATIC ET 200AL Compact Operating Instructions
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Siemens Manuals
  4. I/O Systems
  5. SIMATIC ET 200AL
  6. Compact operating instructions
Siemens SIMATIC ET 200AL Compact Operating Instructions

Siemens SIMATIC ET 200AL Compact Operating Instructions

Distributed i/o system
Hide thumbs Also See for SIMATIC ET 200AL:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
This document contains a compilation
of all manuals for the ET 200AL
system family.
Use the bookmarks on the left edge
of the screen to navigate.
Edition
03/2024
Manual Collection
SIMATIC
ET 200AL
ET 200AL distributed I/O system
support.industry.siemens.com

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the SIMATIC ET 200AL and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Siemens SIMATIC ET 200AL

Summary of Contents for Siemens SIMATIC ET 200AL

  • Page 1 Manual Collection SIMATIC This document contains a compilation of all manuals for the ET 200AL system family. Use the bookmarks on the left edge of the screen to navigate. ET 200AL ET 200AL distributed I/O system Edition 03/2024 support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 2 Edition 04/2024 COMPACT OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS SIMATIC Distributed I/O system ET 200AL Original instructions support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 3 Notes on Safety and Product Conformity Use of radio devices and cell phones SIMATIC Distributed I/O system ET 200AL Compact Operating Instructions Original instructions 04/2024 A5E51784822-AD...
  • Page 4 Table of contents Notes on Safety and Product Conformity................... Use of radio devices and cell phones....................Distributed I/O system ET 200AL Compact Operating Instructions, 04/2024, A5E51784822-AD...
  • Page 5 Documentation The complete documentation consists of product information, the system manual, equipment and function manuals. You can find these in the Manual Collection (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) on the Internet. Retention of the documentation Retain this documentation for later use. 1. Download the documentation after receiving your product and before initial installation/commissioning.

  • Page 6: Compensation, Reference Channel Of Group 0

    Connection of the power supply The power supply may only be connected by qualified and authorized personnel. In particular, observe the information in the documentation (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) and on the nameplate of the device. NOTE The power supply must be connected by the operator/user in accordance with the national regulations regarding installation.
  • Page 7 The product must be operated with safety functional extra low voltage (SELV, PELV). You can find more information on safety functional extra low voltage in the documentation (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) of the fail-safe I/O and in the data sheets of the power supplies to be used.
  • Page 8 Perform a safety inspection for safety-related functions throughout the entire system, including all safety-related components. For fail-safe I/O, observe the notes and warnings in the documentation (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) especially for: • Connecting/wiring • Parameter assignment • Status, fault displays and alarms •...
  • Page 9 F-I/O. This can result in death, serious injury or property damage. If you scan the 2D matrix code/ID Link or use the "SIEMENS Industry Support App" with a powered-on F-I/O, then deactivate all radio connections of the radio device/cell phone beforehand.
  • Page 11 Introduction Safety instructions SIMATIC Industrial cybersecurity ET 200AL Distributed I/O system New properties/functions System Manual System overview Application planning Mounting Connecting Configuring Configuration control (option handling) Commissioning Maintenance Technical specifications Safety-related shutdown of ET200AL standard modules Dimension drawings 12/2023 A5E31861578-AL Continued on next page...
  • Page 12 Continued Accessories/spare parts ET 200AL Distributed I/O system System Manual...
  • Page 13 Table of contents Introduction..........................18,264,450 Introduction......................... 18,808 Siemens Industry Online Support..................20 Industry Mall........................20 ET 200AL Guide........................ 21 1.4.1 Information classes ET 200AL.................... 21 1.4.2 Basic tools........................1.4.3 S7 Failsafe Configuration Tool (S7-FCT)................24 1.4.4 SIMATIC Technical Documentation..................24 Safety instructions..........................
  • Page 14 Hardening measures......................39 3.7.2 Secure configuration......................39 3.7.3 Handling of sensitive data....................40 3.7.4 Regular firmware updates....................40 3.7.5 Notifications about security vulnerabilities (Siemens Security Advisories)......40 3.7.6 Data backup........................3.7.7 Security checks......................... 41 3.7.8 Secure decommissioning....................41 3.7.8.1 Securely removing data....................
  • Page 15 Table of contents Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200AL with fail-safe mod­ ..ules 8.2.1 Safety extra-low-voltage (SELV, PELV) for fail-safe modules..........69 8.2.2 Requirements for sensors and actuators for fail-safe modules..........70 8.2.3 Crosstalk of digital input/output signals................71 Operation of the ET 200AL on grounded/non-grounded infeed..........
  • Page 16 Table of contents 11.5 Identification and maintenance data................. 127 11.5.1 Reading out and entering I&M data................... 127 11.5.2 Data record structure for I&M data..................128 Maintenance............................131 12.1 Replacing modules......................131 12.2 Firmware update......................133 12.3 Resetting interface module to factory settings..............134 12.4 Reactions to errors of the F module...................
  • Page 17 Standards You can find a dated reference to the respective standards or the EC Declaration of Conformity on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14245/cert?ct=444&ci=526). Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 18 Log onto Industry Online Support. Follow the links below and click on "Email on update" on the right-hand side in each case: • SIMATIC S7-300/S7-300F (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13751) • SIMATIC S7-400/S7-400H/S7-400F/FH (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13828) • SIMATIC WinAC RTX (F) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13915) • SIMATIC S7-1500/SIMATIC S7-1500F (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13716) • SIMATIC S7-1200/SIMATIC S7-1200F (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13683) •...
  • Page 19 This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP).
  • Page 20 This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667) Basic information The System Manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
  • Page 21 Manual Collection ET 200AL The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) 1.4.2 Basic tools Tools The tools described below support you in all steps: from planning, over commissioning, all the way to analysis of your system.
  • Page 22 You can find SIEMENS PRONETA Basic on the Internet: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624) SIEMENS PRONETA Professional is a licensed product that offers you additional functions. It offers you simple asset management in PROFINET networks and supports operators of automation systems in automatic data collection/acquisition of the components used through various functions: •...
  • Page 23 Online Support: Industry Online Support International https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742705 Watch this short video to find out where you can find the overview directly in Siemens Industry Online Support and how to use Siemens Industry Online Support on your mobile device: Quick introduction to the technical documentation of automation products per video ( https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/109780491...
  • Page 24 You configure your own download package with a few clicks: • Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN macro files • Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates • Product master data You can find "mySupport" on the Internet. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en) Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 25 The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system - separated from the focus on individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/ae) Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 26 Safety instructions Warnings in this document You can find explanations of the warnings used in this document in the "Legal information" section. Safety-related symbols for IP65/IP67 modules The following table contains an explanation of the symbols located on your IP65/67 modules, their packaging or in the accompanying documentation.
  • Page 27 Safety instructions 2.5 Target group and personnel qualifications Symbol Meaning Note that a 230 V device can be exposed to electrical voltages which can be danger­ ous. ANSI Z535.2 Note that a device of Protection Class III may only be supplied with a protective low voltage according to the standard SELV/PELV.
  • Page 28 Safety instructions 2.7 Working on electrical parts Personal protective equipment The personal protective equipment depends on the activity and is determined by the operator. To avoid material damage during packing, unpacking and installation activities we recommend: • ESD wrist strap •...
  • Page 29 Safety instructions 2.8 Residual risks Residual risks Despite all the technical and procedural risk reductions that have been carried out, not all dangers can be avoided. The following sections describe these residual risks and measures to avoid them. 2.8.1 Live parts Electrocution on contact with live parts leads to life-threatening injuries (death).
  • Page 30 Safety instructions 2.8 Residual risks 2.8.3 Overheating Smoke development and fire due to overheating of module and cables result in burns and life-threatening injuries (death). To avoid overheating: • Ensure the correct installation position. • Ensure sufficient air supply (e.g. maintain mounting clearances). •...
  • Page 31 Safety instructions 2.10 Material damage Behavior in case of emergency • Force EMERGENCY OFF When the safe operating state has been restored: • Unlock the EMERGENCY OFF mechanism. • The person responsible for the system ensures that the system starts up in a controlled and defined manner.
  • Page 32 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 33 Introduction (Page 18) section. Set up notification of security updates To receive notifications about security updates, proceed as follows: 1. Register with mySiePortal (https://sieportal.siemens.com/en-ww/home). 2. Enter the keyword "Security" in the search engine. 3. Choose the "Search in Knowledge base" option.
  • Page 34 Integrated security concept and security strategies 3.4.1 Comprehensive security concept "Defense in Depth" With Defense in Depth, Siemens provides a multi-layer security concept that offers industrial plants comprehensive and far-reaching protection in accordance with the recommendations of the IEC 62443 international standard.
  • Page 35 Industrial cybersecurity 3.4 Integrated security concept and security strategies Siemens will provide you with information and support. Subscribe to the RSS feed (https://www.siemens.com/cert) for vulnerabilities. Register with mySiePortal (https://sieportal.siemens.com/en-ww/home) and create filters to be notified when important information is published. Consider using Siemens Cybersecurity Services.
  • Page 36 Industrial cybersecurity 3.5 Operational application environment and security assumptions Consideration of the risks posed by cyber attacks in the Threat and Risk Assessment (TRA) Make an inventory of all software, hardware, and infrastructure devices, in order to identify risks to the location or organization. Incident response procedures must be incorporated into all IT and manufacturing processes.
  • Page 37 3.5 Operational application environment and security assumptions 3.5.2 Requirements for the operational application environment and security assumptions Siemens recommends the following security measures: • Conducting a threat and risk assessment (as part of security management) • Network security concepts – Network segmentation –...
  • Page 38 Security properties of the devices The security properties of the individual devices are listed in the Equipment Manuals. Secure operation of the system This section describes measures recommended by Siemens to protect your system from manipulation and unauthorized access. 3.7.1...
  • Page 39 Siemens ProductCERT If Siemens identifies or fixes security gaps (Vulnerabilities) in the products, this will be published in the Security Advisories. You can find the documents for SIMATIC on the following Siemens AG Web page: Siemens ProductCERT and Siemens CERT (https://new.siemens.com/global/en/products/services/cert.
  • Page 40 – Measures – Availability – Etc. • Report possible vulnerabilities yourself at (https://new.siemens.com/global/en/products/services/cert.html#ContactInformation) Set up an RSS feed to receive notifications about security-related topics. 3.7.6 Data backup Secure your configuration and parameter settings so that you can quickly restore this data if needed.
  • Page 41 Industrial cybersecurity 3.7 Secure operation of the system 3.7.8.1 Securely removing data Before disposing of components of your automation system, you should securely delete all data from the storage media of these components. How to securely delete data from the devices so that it cannot be recovered is described below.
  • Page 42 Industrial cybersecurity 3.9 Secure operation of interface modules For more information on resetting the interface module to factory settings, refer to the section Resetting an interface module to factory settings (Page %getreference). NOTE TIA Portal V19 Only the communication parameters will be securely deleted on "Reset to factory settings" with the "Delete I&M data"...
  • Page 43 Industrial cybersecurity 3.9 Secure operation of interface modules Principle The interface module calculates checksums based on its used data and the supplied data from the associated modules, such as parameter settings, IP address, device name, MAC address and I&M data. The interface module stores the checksums in the I&M4 data area. A CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is always the same for a specific, unchanged memory content.
  • Page 44 Firmware updates for interface modules starting from article number 6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0 include a digital signature. The digitally signed firmware update files are available for download on the Siemens Support Web page. The interface module verifies the authenticity and integrity of the firmware update file before installation using the digital signature with standardized asymmetric cryptography methods.
  • Page 45 In case of firmware update rejection, proceed as follows: 1. Verify if the firmware update file you are using comes from a secure source. 2. Download the firmware again from the Siemens Support website. 3. Repeat the firmware update.
  • Page 46 New properties/functions What's new in Edition 11/2023 of the ET 200AL System Manual compared with Edition 12/2022? What's new? What are the customer benefits? Where can I find the informa­ tion? New con­ General security instructions The section contains a compilation of general Section Safety instructions (Page tents security instructions for the ET 200AL distrib­...
  • Page 47 System overview What is the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system? SIMATIC ET 200AL The SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system is a scalable and highly flexible, distributed I/O system for connecting process signals to a higher-level control system with a field bus. The MultiFieldbus (MF) supports the following communication protocols: •...
  • Page 48 System overview 5.1 What is the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system? Customer benefits of the system Figure 1-2  ET 200AL benefits Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 49 System overview 5.1 What is the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system? Area of application The SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system is especially well suited for use in tight spaces, moving applications and for assembly and handling technology. Thanks to its scalable construction, you have the option to precisely customize its configuration to your on site needs.
  • Page 50 System overview 5.1 What is the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system? Configuration example The figure below shows a configuration example of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system with a PROFINET interface module. ① Interface module (PROFINET) ② Fail-safe digital input / digital output module ③...
  • Page 51 Safety Integrated Safety Integrated is the integrated safety concept for automation and drive technology from Siemens. Proven technologies and systems from automation technology are used for safety systems. Safety Integrated includes the complete safety sequence, ranging from sensor, actuator and fail-safe modules right through to the controller, including safety-related communication via standard fieldbuses.
  • Page 52 System overview 5.2 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules? Use in SIMATIC Safety F-systems The fail-safe ET 200AL modules can be used with STEP 7 Safety Advanced from V17 with PROFINET and direct ET connection configurations together with an F‑CPU. The fail-safe modules can only be used in safety mode.
  • Page 53 System overview 5.3 Components Components Components of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system The following table shows and explains the function of the most important components of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system. Table 1-2  Components of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system Components Function View Interface module for MultiFieldbus...
  • Page 54 System overview 5.3 Components Components Function View Bus cable and M8 connector for The bus cable creates the bus connection ET‑Connection between the modules Power cable and M8 connector for The power cable provides power to the modules power supply Stripping tool ET-Connection The stripping tool is used to strip the ET-Connection bus cable...
  • Page 55 Application planning Hardware configuration Mechanical maximum configuration The following tables show the rules of the mechanical configuration. As soon as one of the following rules applies, the maximum configuration has been reached. Table 1-3  Maximum mechanical configuration - on ET 200AL interface module Properties Rule (max.) Interface...
  • Page 56 Application planning 6.2 Configuration variants with ET-Connection Electrical maximum configuration The number of usable I/O modules of a potential group is limited by the following points: • Power requirements of the I/O modules • Power requirements of the components supplied via these I/O modules The maximum infeed current of the I/O modules is 4 A with 1L+ supply voltage (non- switched) and 2L+ load voltage (switched).
  • Page 57 Application planning 6.2 Configuration variants with ET-Connection ET-Connection1 and ET-Connection2 The figure below shows a configuration in the IP65/IP67 environment with two ET-Connection lines Figure 1-5  ET 200AL with ET-Connection1 and ET-Connection2 Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 58 Application planning 6.2 Configuration variants with ET-Connection 6.2.2 Hybrid configuration ET 200AL/ET 200SP with ET-Connection Hybrid configuration ET 200AL and ET 200SP You have the possibility to integrate standard and fail-safe I/O modules of the distributed I/O systems ET 200AL (IP65/IP67) into a configuration of the distributed I/O system ET 200SP (IP20).
  • Page 59 Details on the hybrid configuration are available here (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/100300517). Procedure Watch video sequence (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95886672) Proceed as follows to put together a multi-tier configuration: 1. Mount the BaseUnit BU-Send directly to the right of the ET 200SP interface module or the ET 200SP CPU.
  • Page 60 Mounting Basics Introduction All the modules of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system are designed for the degree of protection IP65/IP67. This means that you can directly mount this system in your plant. Installation position You can mount the ET 200AL distributed I/O system in any position. Minimum clearances At ambient temperatures of 50 °C or higher, please ensure that the module is mounted at a distance of least 1 cm from an adjacent module or another device.
  • Page 61 Mounting 7.2 Mounting modules Mounting modules Introduction The modules of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system are designed for installation on a level, firm surface. Thanks to the axisymmetrical drill holes in the modules, you have the option to fasten the modules on an aluminum profile using tee nuts.
  • Page 62 • The distance between the top and bottom drill hole is identical for all modules. Mounting interface module and 45 mm I/O modules (front) Watch video sequence (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95886672) The interface modules and the 45 mm I/O modules have an attachment point on top and on the bottom.
  • Page 63 7.2 Mounting modules Mounting 30 mm I/O modules (front or side) Watch video sequence (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95886672) The 30 mm I/O modules have an attachment point on top and on the bottom. You also have the option of fastening the 30 mm I/O modules at the side. When fastening them at the side, you must use the supplied spacers.
  • Page 64 Mounting 7.2 Mounting modules Fastening for cable ties All module of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system have an integrated attachment point for cable ties. The attachment points are found on all four corners of the modules. The figure below shows the top left attachment point for 2.5 mm wide cable ties for fastening the cables.
  • Page 65 Connecting Rules and regulations for operation Introduction Depending on the area of application, the ET 200AL distributed I/O system, as a component of plants and systems, requires that special rules and specifications be followed. This section gives an overview of the most important rules to be followed for integration of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system in a plant or in a system.
  • Page 66 If there is a danger due to overvoltages, you must take lightning protection measures for internal lightning protection (e.g. lightning protection elements. You will find additional information in the Designing interference-free controllers (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59193566) function manual). • For 24 V DC supply: Ensure that there is a safe (electrical) separation of low voltage (SELV/PELV) according to IEC 61010-2-201 or IEC 60950-1.
  • Page 67 • For signal and bus cables, you must ensure that a wire/cable breakage or a cross-wire does not lead to undefined states of the plant or system. Reference Additional information can be found in the function manual Designing interference-free con­ trollers (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59193566). Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 68 To meet the product standard for burner controls (EN 298), the wiring must be equipped with external protection against coupled surge voltages caused by lightning. Further information on this can be found in the function manual Designing interference-free controllers (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59193566). Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 69 Connecting 8.2 Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200AL with fail-safe modules 8.2.2 Requirements for sensors and actuators for fail-safe modules General requirements for sensors and actuators Note the following important warning regarding safety-related use of sensors and actuators: WARNING Note that instrumentation with sensors and actuators bears a considerable safety responsibility.
  • Page 70 Connecting 8.2 Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200AL with fail-safe modules The minimum duration of sensor signals for F-modules with inputs depends on the configured input delay, the parameters of the short circuit test of the sensor supplies, and the configured discrepancy behavior for 1oo2 evaluation.
  • Page 71 Connecting 8.3 Operation of the ET 200AL on grounded/non-grounded infeed Note that an inductive load connected to the F-DQ channels can induce coupling of a strong magnetic field. Remedy: • Separate the inductive loads spatially or shield against the magnetic field. •...
  • Page 72 Connecting 8.3 Operation of the ET 200AL on grounded/non-grounded infeed Configuring ET 200AL with grounded reference potential When configuring the ET 200AL distributed I/O system with grounded reference potential, occurring interference currents are discharged into functional earth. The connections must be externally connected (connection between 1M and FE). Configuring ET 200AL with ungrounded reference potential When configuring the ET 200AL distributed I/O system with non-grounded reference potential, occurring interference currents are discharged via an internal RC network to...
  • Page 73 Connecting 8.3 Operation of the ET 200AL on grounded/non-grounded infeed Components and protective measures Various components and protective measures are stipulated for setting up a complete plant. The types of components and the degree to which the protective measures are mandatory depend on the IEC regulation that applies to your plant setup.
  • Page 74 Connecting 8.4 Electrical configuration of the ET 200AL Electrical configuration of the ET 200AL Electrical isolation When electrically configuring the ET 200AL distributed I/O system, there is electrical isolation between: • Load voltage 2L+ and all other switching parts • Communication interfaces (PROFINET/PROFIBUS) of the interface modules and all other switching parts •...
  • Page 75 Connecting 8.4 Electrical configuration of the ET 200AL Figure 1-13  Potential conditions of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (Part 2) Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 76 Connecting 8.4 Electrical configuration of the ET 200AL Figure 1-14  Potential conditions of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (Part 3) Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 77 Connecting 8.4 Electrical configuration of the ET 200AL Connection of a digital output with a digital input NOTICE Pay attention to the potential group When a digital output is connected to a digital input, pay attention to the potential groups. Depending on the configuration, 1M and 2M may then be connected, resulting in elimination of the electrical isolation between 1L+ and 2L+.
  • Page 78 Connecting 8.5 Connecting ET 200AL to functional earth The figure below shows a configuration with a new voltage infeed for the modules. The different potential groups have a gray background. Figure 1-15  Wiring of the power supply Reference You will find additional information on electrical configuration and the voltage drop in the section Connecting cables for ET 200AL (Page %getreference).
  • Page 79 Connecting 8.5 Connecting ET 200AL to functional earth 8.5.1 Mounting ET 200AL modules on conductive substrate Requirement Conductive substrate for mounting of the module Required tools To connect to functional earth, you need the following tools: • Screwdriver Required accessories: To connect to functional earth, you need the following accessories: •...
  • Page 80 Connecting 8.5 Connecting ET 200AL to functional earth 8.5.2 Mounting ET 200AL modules on non-conductive substrate Requirement Conductive substrate for mounting of the module Required tools To connect to functional earth, you need the following tools: • Screwdriver • Stripping tool •...
  • Page 81 Connecting 8.5 Connecting ET 200AL to functional earth Mounting To connect modules of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system to functional earth, proceed as follows: 1. Drill two fastening holes. 2. Strip the grounding cable. 3. Fasten the cable lug to the grounding cable. 4.
  • Page 82 Connecting 8.6 Connecting cables for ET 200AL Connecting cables for ET 200AL Impact of cable length on the supply voltage When wiring your configuration, you must take into account the impact of the cable length on the supply voltage of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system. CAUTION Pay attention to maximum incoming currents For each power supply (1L+, 2L+), you can feed in a maximum of 4A.
  • Page 83 Connecting 8.7 Wiring Wiring Connection Connect all cables to the front side of the modules: • Supply voltage and ET-Connection to the 4-pin M8 round sockets and M8 round connectors • Signal lines to the 3-pin M8 or 4/5-pin M12 round sockets •...
  • Page 84 Connecting 8.7 Wiring Accessories required for the connection of ET-Connection You need the following accessories: • ET-Connection cables • 4-pin M8 connection plug NOTE ET-Connection cables When connecting ET-Connection use only the offered cables. Connecting M8 plugs To connect M8 plugs, proceed as follows: 1.
  • Page 85 Pin assignment of the sockets The pin assignment of the sockets can be found in the manuals for the interface modules (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14246/man) and I/O modules (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14247/man) in the section on pin assignment and on the side surface of the module. Distributed I/O system...
  • Page 86 Connecting 8.7 Wiring Y-cable The Y-cable allows you to connect two actuators or sensors to the inputs or outputs. The use of a Y-cable is particularly recommended when two channels are occupied for each socket of an I/O device. The Y-cable distributes the channels to two circular connectors. •...
  • Page 87 Inverted Y-cable The inverted Y-cable enables the connection of fail-safe inputs and a fail-safe output to an I/O device (for example a Siemens SIRIUS safety position switch with interlock) with only one cable. You can find details about connection in the respective user manual of the product.
  • Page 88 Connecting 8.8 ET 200AL marking ET 200AL marking 8.8.1 Factory markings Introduction For better orientation, the ET 200AL distributed I/O system is identified using various markings which will help you when configuring and connecting the modules. Marking of the interfaces The interfaces of the modules are factory-labeled. The table below shows the labeling of the interfaces.
  • Page 89 Connecting 8.8 ET 200AL marking 8.8.2 Optional markings Introduction In addition to the factory markings, there are also optional possibilities for labeling and/or identifying interfaces and modules on the ET 200AL distributed I/O system. Identification label The identification labels come with each module as strips and can be machine-printed. A strip has 10 identification labels measuring 10 x 5 mm in the color RAL9016.
  • Page 90 Connecting 8.8 ET 200AL marking 8.8.3 Mounting identification labels Introduction This section describes how to mount or remove identification labels. Required tools You need a screwdriver with 3 mm blade width (only to remove identification labels). Mounting procedure To mount an identification label, proceed as follows: 1.
  • Page 91 Configuring Introduction You configure and assign parameters for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (interface modules and I/O modules) using STEP 7 or the configuration software of another manufacturer. Requirements Table 1-9  Configuration software and requirements Configuration software Requirements Installation information STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V19 for •...
  • Page 92 STEP 7 as of V5.5 SP4 for all IO • PROFINET IO, PROFIBUS DP: modules as of Support Package HSP 0260 STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V13 • PROFINET IO Update 3 GSD file: GSDML-Vx.y-Siemens- ET200AL-"Date in format yyyymm­ Software of third-party manufac­ Manufacturer documenta­ dd".xml turer tion (https://support.industry.siemens. com/cs/ww/en/view/92346477) for example: GSDML-V2.31-Siemens-...
  • Page 93 Configuring Configuring - MultiFieldbus maximum configuration Each of the connections for ET-Connection occupies a slot in the configuration. The slots for ET-Connection1 and ET-Connection2 are pre-defined statically in the GSD file. ET-Connection1 is always at slot 1 and ET‑Connection2 at slot 18. The fixed slot assignment of ET-Connection1 and ET-Connection2 offers you the following advantages: •...
  • Page 94 Configuring Configuration - PROFINET maximum configuration Each of the connections for ET-Connection occupies a slot in the configuration. The slots for ET-Connection1 and ET-Connection2 are specified statically in the PROFINET GSD file. ET-Connection1 is permanently on slot 1 and ET‑Connection2 on slot 18. The fixed slot assignment of ET-Connection1 and ET-Connection2 offers you the following advantages: •...
  • Page 95 Configuring Configuration - PROFIBUS maximum configuration Each of the connections for ET‑Connection occupies a slot in the configuration. The slot for ET‑Connection1 is statically defined in the PROFIBUS GSD file. ET‑Connection1 is always permanently installed in slot 1. Always place the topology module for ET‑Connection2 on slot 18.
  • Page 96 You can find additional information about the assignment of the PROFIsafe addresses in the manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/54110126). Reference You can find additional information on this topic in section Configuration control (option handling) (Page %getreference).
  • Page 97 Configuration control (option handling) 10.1 Configuration control Introduction With configuration control (option handling), you handle various standard machine configuration levels in one project without having to change the hardware configuration or user program. Operating principle of configuration controlSee configuration control You can use configuration control to operate different standard machine configurations with a single configuration of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
  • Page 98 Configuration control (option handling) 10.1 Configuration control The following figure shows 3 configurations of a standard machine with the corresponding station options of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system. Figure 1-28  Various configuration levels of a standard machine with the corresponding station options of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
  • Page 99 Library for configuration control A library for configuration control is available for download (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/29430270) on the internet. The library contains data types with the structure of the control data records for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system. You can implement your flexible automation solution economically with the help of these data types.
  • Page 100 Configuration control (option handling) 10.2 Configuring • The parameter "Operation if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" is activated. The parameter "Operation if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" is located in STEP 7 in the properties of the interface module under "Module parameters" > "Start-up".
  • Page 101 Configuration control (option handling) 10.3 Creating the control data record 10.3 Creating the control data record 10.3.1 Introduction Required steps The following description shows as an example how you can create a control data record for the configuration control in STEP 7 (TIA Portal). To create a control data record for the configuration control, follow these steps: 1.
  • Page 102 Configuration control (option handling) 10.3 Creating the control data record 4. In the "Start value" column of the control data records, enter which module is located at which slot. Figure 1-32  Assigning slots Rules Observe the following rules: • Slot entries in the control data record outside the station master are ignored by the interface module.
  • Page 103 Configuration control (option handling) 10.3 Creating the control data record 10.3.2 Control data record for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system Slot assignment NOTE Topology modules ET-Connetion1 and ET-Connection2 Both topology modules ET-Connection1 and ET-Connection2 should be treated like real modules during configuration control. Restriction: ET-Connetion1 is always placed in Slot 1 and ET‑Connection2 is always placed in Plot 18.
  • Page 104 You have moved the DQ module to Slot 2 in the station option. In order to set up PROFIenergy for this module use Slot 2 in Data record 3. You can find more information about PROFIenergy in the Interface module IM 157-1 PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254863) Equipment Manual. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 105 Configuration control (option handling) 10.3 Creating the control data record 10.3.3 Feedback data record at the ET200AL distributed I/O system Operating principle The feedback data record informs you about the accuracy of the module assignment and gives you the option of detecting assignment errors in the control data record. The feedback data record is mapped via a separate data record 197 V2.0.
  • Page 106 Configuration control (option handling) 10.3 Creating the control data record Error messages In the case of an error when reading the feedback data record, the RDREC instruction returns the following error messages via the STATUS block parameter: Table 1-13  Error messages Error code Meaning 80B1...
  • Page 107 Configuration control (option handling) 10.3 Creating the control data record Station option with associated control data record The configuration with the station options 2 and 4 differ from the station master as follows: • The modules for options 1 and 3 do not exist. Figure 1-33  Example: Hardware configuration of Station option 2 and 4 with the associated control data record in STEP 7 Distributed I/O system...
  • Page 108 Configuration control (option handling) 10.3 Creating the control data record Extension by a station option The following figure shows the configuration with the Station options 2 and 4 that has subsequently been extended by the Station option 3. The modules of option 3 are added to the modules already existing. Figure 1-34  Example: Hardware configuration of station option 2 to 4 with the associated control data record in STEP 7 Distributed I/O system...
  • Page 109 You can find a detailed application example for the configuration control in S7‑1500 in here under the keyword "Application example for ET 200SP (PROFINET) and S7‑1500 based on the library" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/29430270). 10.4 Transferring the control data record in the user program of the...
  • Page 110 Configuration control (option handling) 10.4 Transferring the control data record in the user program of the CPU Special requirements relating to the transfer of the control data record to the interface module • If you have enabled configuration control, the ET 200AL station is not ready for operation without a control data record.
  • Page 111 Configuration control (option handling) 10.5 Behavior during operation 10.5 Behavior during operation Effect of discrepancy between station master and station option For the online display and for the display in the diagnostics buffer (module OK or module faulty), the station master is always used and not the differing station option. Example: A module outputs diagnostics data.
  • Page 112 Commissioning 11.1 PROFINET IO 11.1.1 Commissioning ET 200AL on PROFINET IO Introduction The commissioning of your distributed I/O system depends on the system configuration. The following procedure describes the commissioning of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on an IO controller. Requirements for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on PROFINET IO NOTE Performing tests You must ensure the safety of your plant.
  • Page 113 IM 157-1 MF interface module (https://support.industry.siemens. com/cs/ww/en/view/109824723) ET 200AL interface module automatically switches to RUN mode Reference You can find additional information on assigning the PROFINET IO parameters in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) function manual. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 114 Commissioning 11.1 PROFINET IO 11.1.2 Startup on PROFINET IO Principle of operation The figure below schematically shows the startup of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on the PROFINET IO (= IO device) as a flow chart. Figure 1-35  Startup of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on the PROFINET IO Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 115 Commissioning 11.1 PROFINET IO The figure below schematically shows the startup of an ET 200AL I/O module after an ET 200AL PROFINET interface module. Figure 1-36  Startup of the ET 200AL I/O module Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 116 You will find more information on the Internet (https://www.profibus.com) under Common Application Profile PROFIenergy; Technical Specification for PROFINET; as well as in the following documentation: • IM 157‑1 PN interface module (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254863) manual • I/O modules (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14247/man) manuals • PROFINET System Description (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/19292127) system manual • PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856), function manual, Section: Saving energy with PROFIenergy •...
  • Page 117 Section Connecting (Page 66) Configuring the ET 200AL interface module Section Configuring (Page 92) Turning on the supply voltage for the IM 157-1 MF interface module ET 200AL interface module (https://support.industry.siemens. com/cs/ww/en/view/109824723) equipment manual ET 200AL interface module automatically switches to RUN mode...
  • Page 118 Commissioning 11.2 EtherNet/IP 11.2.2 Startup on EtherNet/IP Principle of operation The following figure shows a schematic flow chart of the startup of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on EtherNet/IP. The interface module is in the network of the EtherNet/IP adapter and communicates with the scanner.
  • Page 119 Commissioning 11.2 EtherNet/IP The figure below schematically shows the startup of an ET 200AL I/O module after an ET 200AL EtherNet/IP interface module as a flow chart. Figure 1-38  Startup of an ET 200AL I/O module Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 120 Configuring the ET 200AL interface module Section Configuring (Page 92) Turning on the supply voltage for the Equipment manual IM 157-1 MF interface ET 200AL interface module module (https://support.industry.siemens. com/cs/ww/en/view/109824723) ET 200AL interface module automatically switches to RUN mode Reference You can find additional information about configuring the parameters of Modbus TCP in the function manual MultiFieldbus function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109773209).
  • Page 121 Commissioning 11.3 Modbus TCP 11.3.2 Startup on Modbus TCP Principle of operation The following figure shows as flow chart schematically the start-up of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on Modbus TCP. The interface module is the Modbus TCP server in the network and communicates with the client.
  • Page 122 Commissioning 11.3 Modbus TCP The figure below schematically shows the startup of an ET 200AL I/O module after an ET 200AL Modubus TCP interface module as a flow chart. Figure 1-40  Startup of the ET 200AL I/O module Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 123 Mounting the ET 200AL interface module Section Mounting (Page 61) Setting the PROFIBUS DP address on the IM 157‑1 DP interface module ET 200AL PROFIBUS interface module (https://support.industry.siemens. com/cs/ww/en/view/89255073) manual, sec­ tion Setting the PROFIBUS DP address and terminating resistor Wiring the ET 200AL interface module Section Connecting (Page 66) Configuring the ET 200AL interface module Section Configuring (Page 92)
  • Page 124 Commissioning 11.4 PROFIBUS DP 11.4.2 Startup on PROFIBUS DP Principle of operation The figure below schematically shows the startup of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on the PROFIBUS DP (= DP slave) as a flow chart. Figure 1-41  Startup of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on PROFIBUS DP Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 125 Commissioning 11.4 PROFIBUS DP The figure below schematically shows the startup of an ET 200AL I/O module after an ET 200AL PROFIBUS interface module as flow chart. Figure 1-42  Startup of an ET 200AL I/O module Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 126 Commissioning 11.5 Identification and maintenance data 11.5 Identification and maintenance data 11.5.1 Reading out and entering I&M data Introduction Identification data I&M is information that is saved either as read-only (I data) or read/write (M data) on the interface module. Identification data (I&M0): Manufacturer information on the module that is read-only and in some cases is also printed on the module housing, for example, article number, serial number and firmware version.
  • Page 127 Reference You can find additional information on I&M data of the ET 200SP (mixed configuration) in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual. 11.5.2 Data record structure for I&M data Reading I&M data records (distributed via PROFINET IO) You can directly access specific identification data by selecting Read data record ("RDREC"...
  • Page 128 Default Explanation Identification data 0: (data record index AFF0 hex) VendorIDHigh read (1 byte) This is where the name of the manufac­ turer is stored (42 = SIEMENS AG). VendorIDLow read (1 byte) Order_ID read (20 bytes) 6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0 Article number of module (e.g. IM 157-1 MF) IM_SERIAL_NUMBER read (16 bytes)
  • Page 129 Commissioning 11.5 Identification and maintenance data Identification data Access Default Explanation IM_DATE Read/write YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM Enter the installation date of the module (16 bytes) here. Maintenance data 3: (data record index AFF3 hex) IM_DESCRIPTOR Read/write Enter a comment describing the module. (54 bytes) Maintenance data 4: (data record index AFF4 hex) Read (4 bytes)
  • Page 130 Maintenance 12.1 Replacing modules Replacing modules Replacing a module is not permitted during ongoing operation. WARNING Material damage can occur If you remove/insert modules with the power connected, this can lead to undefined states in your system. Material damage to the ET 200AL distributed I/O system may occur as a result. Only remove or replace modules when the power is disconnected.
  • Page 131 Maintenance 12.1 Replacing modules Procedure To replace a module, proceed as follows: 1. Disconnect the supply voltage to the module to be replaced. 2. Completely remove all cables connected to the module. 3. Completely remove the fixing screws of the module 4.
  • Page 132  If there is an update via EtherNet/IP, for example, the MultiFieldbus interface module remains in EtherNet/IP mode. Reference More information about the procedure: • FAQs on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/88778936) • STEP 7 online help • MultiFieldbus function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109773209) function manual...
  • Page 133 Maintenance 12.3 Resetting interface module to factory settings 12.3 Resetting interface module to factory settings This section applies to interface modules with one or more of these communication protocols: • PROFINET • EtherNet/IP • Modbus TCP Introduction When you "Reset to factory settings", the interface module is reset to the delivery state settings.
  • Page 134 STOP operating mode. The event "Reset to factory settings" is entered in the diagnostics buffer. Procedure using MFCT You can find information on the procedure via MFCT under "MultiFieldbus function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109773209)" in the "Resetting the MF device" section. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 135 Maintenance 12.4 Reactions to errors of the F module Reference You will find more information on the procedure in the STEP 7 online help. 12.4 Reactions to errors of the F module Safe state (safety concept) The basic principle behind the safety concept is the presence of a safe state for all process tags.
  • Page 136 For additional information on passivation and reintegration of F-I/O modules, refer to the SIMATIC Safety – Configuring and Programming (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/54110126) manual. Reaction of the F-module with inputs to communication errors F-modules with inputs react differently to communication errors than to other errors.
  • Page 137 Maintenance 12.5 Cleaning modules 12.5 Cleaning modules When wired, ET 200AL modules comply with degree of protection IP65/IP67 and do not require any cleaning. If you do have to clean the modules, then use a dry or damp cloth. Please take care to comply with degree of protection IP65/67 when cleaning with liquids. Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 138 You can find the associated certificates for download on the Internet. See also: ET 200AL approvals (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14245/cert) CE marking The ET 200AL distributed I/O system fulfills the requirements and protection targets of the...
  • Page 139 Equipment Regulations 2012 (RoHS) • Supply of Machinery (Safety) Regulations 2008 for ET 200AL safety components (fail-safe modules) UK Declarations of Conformity for the respective authorities are available from: Siemens AG Digital Industries Factory Automation DI FA TI COS TT Postfach 1963...
  • Page 140 Technical specifications 13.1 Marks and approvals Description Article number AQ 4xU/I, 4xM12 6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0 Communications modules CM 4xIO-LINK, 4xM12 6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0 The following table shows the modules that are approved for UL50/NEMA250 Enclosure Type 1. Table 1-23  Modules approved according to UL50/NEMA250 Enclosure Type 1 Description Article number E75310...
  • Page 141 • RINA (Registro Italiano Navale) After a successful approval you can find the certificates with the certified article numbers in the Internet. See also: ET 200AL Marine/Shipbuilding (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14245/cert?ct=446) NOTE The fail-safe module F DI 4+F DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12 of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system does not support the specified marine approvals due to the increased supply voltage requirements.
  • Page 142 Technical specifications 13.3 Standards and requirements IO-Link standard The IO-Link interfaces of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system are based on the standard IEC 61131-9. Use in industrial environments The ET 200AL distributed I/O devices are designed for the industrial field. It meets the following standards for this type of use: •...
  • Page 143 Analog value deviation beyond the limits of the nominal range and diagnostics possible. If greater phase to ground or phase to phase values are required, you will need an additional external protective circuit (see function manual Designing interference-free controllers (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59193566)). Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 144 Technical specifications 13.4 Electromagnetic compatibility Sinusoidal disturbance variables The following tables show the electromagnetic compatibility of the distributed I/O systems to sinusoidal disturbance variables. Table 1-25  RF radiation RF radiation according to IEC 61000-4-3 Conforms to Electromagnetic RF field, amplitude modulated degree of sever­...
  • Page 145 Technical specifications 13.5 Transport and storage conditions 24 V supply connection The following table shows measuring ranges of the power supply according to EN 55016. Table 1-28  Interference emission from the power supply Frequency Interference emission 0.15 ... 0.5 MHz 79 dB (µV) Q 66 dB (µV) M 0.5 ... 30 MHz 73 dB (µV) Q 60 dB (µV) M...
  • Page 146 – Class OTH2 You can find the values for the operating conditions in the technical specifications of the manuals or on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/109742718). Tests of mechanical ambient conditions The following table shows the type and scope of the tests on mechanical ambient conditions.
  • Page 147 Technical specifications 13.7 Details on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage The following table shows the modules with functional versions which are permitted to -30 °C. Table 1-32  Extended temperature range to -30 °C Description Article number As of functional version Interface modules ET 200AL IM 157-1 DP interface module 6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0...
  • Page 148 Technical specifications 13.7 Details on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage Severity for voltage interruption The I/O devices of the distributed I/O system ET 200AL meet the severity class PS1 for voltage interruption (5 ms). Pollution degree / overvoltage category pursuant to IEC 61010-2-201 Connected according to the specifications in the "Wiring (Page 84)"...
  • Page 149 Safety-related shutdown of ET200AL standard modules Introduction The diagram below illustrates the fail-safe shutdown of ET 200AL standard modules. In the configuration shown in the diagram below, all digital outputs that are operated with the 2L+ and 2M supply of the ET 200AL standard modules are switched to the safe OFF state. This step achieves the safety class SIL2/category 3/PLd.
  • Page 150 Safety-related shutdown of ET200AL standard modules Block diagram Figure 1-44  Higher-level safety circuit with safety relay WARNING Note potential groups for safety-related shutdown When a digital output is connected to a digital input, pay attention to the potential groups. Depending on the configuration, 1M and 2M can then be connected, which leads to elimination of the electrical isolation between 1L+ and 2L+.
  • Page 151 In this FAQ, you can find the SIMATIC standard modules that are suitable for safety-related shutdown. Request German Technical Inspectorate report (Report no. SN89858T) You can request copies of the German Technical Inspectorate report at the following address: SIEMENS AG Digital Industries DI FA TI COS TT P.O. Box 1963...
  • Page 152 40 mm to 46 mm. Detailed information on the dimensions of the individual modules can be found in the manuals for the Interface modules (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14246/man) and I/O modules (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14247/man) in the section "Dimension drawing". Figure 1-45  Module dimension drawings (front view)
  • Page 153 Accessories/spare parts 16.1 Accessories/spare parts Accessories for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system Table 1-34  Accessories for ET‑Connection Designation Length Article number Cable Standard Bus cable for ET‑Connection M8, pre-assembled on both 0.19 m 6ES7194‑2LH02‑0AA0 6ES7194‑2MH02‑0AA0 sides with 2 x M8 connectors, 4-pin, shielded 0.3 m 6ES7194‑2LH03‑0AA0 6ES7194‑2MH03‑0AA0...
  • Page 154 Accessories/spare parts 16.1 Accessories/spare parts Designation Length Article number connector and M8 socket, 4-pin 0.3 m 6ES7194‑2LH03‑1AA0 6ES7194‑2MH03‑1AA0 1.0 m 6ES7194‑2LH10‑1AA0 6ES7194‑2MH10‑1AA0 2.0 m 6ES7194‑2LH20‑1AA0 6ES7194‑2MH20‑1AA0 5.0 m 6ES7194‑2LH50‑1AA0 6ES7194‑2MH50‑1AA0 10.0 m 6ES7194‑2LN10‑1AA0 6ES7194‑2MN10‑1AA0 15.0 m 6ES7194‑2LN15‑1AA0 6ES7194‑2MN15‑1AA0 Power cable M8, pre-assembled on both sides with 0.3 m 6ES7194‑2LH03‑1AB0 6ES7194‑2MH03‑1AB0...
  • Page 155 Accessories/spare parts 16.1 Accessories/spare parts Table 1-37  Non-preassembled cable M12 Designation Article number Non-preassembled cable for X1 DP1 and X1 DP2 PROFIBUS FC Cable FC Standard Cable 6XV1830‑0EH10 FC Trailing Cable 6XV1830‑3EH10 FC Food Cable (PE sheath) 6XV1830‑0GH10 FC Robust Cable (PUR sheath) 6XV1830‑0JH10 FC FRNC Cable (FRNC sheath) 6XV1830‑0LH10...
  • Page 156 Accessories/spare parts 16.1 Accessories/spare parts Designation Article number PROFIBUS M12 connecting cable, trailing cable, pre- 15.0 m 6XV1830‑3DN15‑0SB0 assembled on both sides with PROFIBUS M12 connect­ ors, angled (one end with socket, one end with pin) Pre-assembled cable for X1 P1R PN (LAN) and X1 P2R PN (LAN) PROFINET M12 connecting cable, trailing cable, pre- 0.3 m 6XV1870‑8AE30...
  • Page 157 F-source addresses for F-modules Online catalog Other article numbers for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system can be found on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com) in the online catalog and the online order system. 16.2 Cables Cables for ET-Connection standard and PUR cable The cables for ET-Connection are available in the following versions and lengths: •...
  • Page 158 Accessories/spare parts 16.2 Cables General information IP65 IP67 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during mounting minimum -30 °C maximum 80 °C Storage/transport temperature Ambient temperature during transport and storage minimum -40 °C maximum 80 °C Cables Cable designation 2Y(ST)CY 1x4x0.5/1.0-100-GN Number of electrical wires Design of shielding Overlapped aluminum-lined sheet, coated with shielding made of tin plated copper wires...
  • Page 159 Accessories/spare parts 16.2 Cables The following table shows the technical properties of the bus cable ET-Connection, PUR cable. Table 1-42  Cables for ET-Connection, PUR cable General information Product type designation BUS CABLE ET-CONNECTION, PUR CABLE Function To connect ET-CONNECTION devices with degree of protection IP65/IP67 Degree of protection and protection class IP65...
  • Page 160 Accessories/spare parts 16.2 Cables General information Wire insulation material Cable sheath material Material property halogen free Material property silicon free * = Applies to cable lengths up to 10 meters. Connecting cable for ET-Connection standard and PUR cable You can use the connecting cable between two cables for ET-Connection. Typical applications for using connecting cable for ET-Connection are: •...
  • Page 161 Accessories/spare parts 16.2 Cables General information Design of shielding Overlapped aluminum-lined sheet, coated with shielding made of tin plated copper wires Cable length 0.2 m Outside diameter of the inner conductor 0.5 mm Outside diameter of the wire insulation 1.0 mm Outside diameter of the cable sheath 5 mm Permissible bending radius...
  • Page 162 Accessories/spare parts 16.2 Cables General information Cable designation 2Y(ST)C11Y 2x2x0.5/1.0-100-GN Number of electrical wires Design of shielding Overlapped aluminum-lined sheet, coated with shielding made of tin plated copper wires Cable length 0.2 m Outside diameter of the inner conductor 0.5 mm Outside diameter of the wire insulation 1.0 mm Outside diameter of the cable sheath...
  • Page 163 Accessories/spare parts 16.2 Cables General information Degree of protection and protection class IP65 IP67 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during mounting minimum -30 °C maximum 80 °C Storage/transport temperature Ambient temperature during transport and storage minimum -40 °C maximum 80 °C Cables Cable designation 4 Li9Y 0.50 mm²...
  • Page 164 Accessories/spare parts 16.2 Cables The following table shows the technical properties of the power supply, PUR cable Table 1-46  Cables for power supply, PUR cable General information Product type designation POWER CABLE M8, PUR CABLE Function For connection of ET 200AL for 24 V DC power sup­ Degree of protection and protection class IP65 IP67...
  • Page 165 Accessories/spare parts 16.2 Cables General information Cable sheath material PE-PUR Material property halogen free Material property silicon free Distributed I/O system System Manual, 12/2023, A5E31861578-AL...
  • Page 166 M8 plug connector with high degree of protec­ tion, 4-pin, metal version Suitability for use for connecting ET-CONNECTION nodes (e.g. SIMATIC ET 200AL) in degree of protection IP65 / Degree and class of protection   IP degree of protection IP65/67 Ambient conditions  ...
  • Page 167 Accessories/spare parts 16.3 Connectors Article number 6ES7194-2AC00-0AA0 Ambient temperature during   storage/transportation • min. -40 °C • max. 85 °C connection method / header   Connector type M8, 4-pole Type of electrical connection for mains supply Screw terminals line connectable cable cross-section for mains 0.14 mm²...
  • Page 168 Accessories/spare parts 16.4 Pin assignment and core color Article number 6ES7194-2AA00-0AA0 connection method / header   Connector type M8, 4-pole Type of electrical connection for mains supply Screw terminals line • connectable cable cross-section for mains 0.14 mm² supply line, min. •...
  • Page 169 Accessories/spare parts 16.4 Pin assignment and core color Table 1-48  Pin assignment for ET-Connection (I/O modules) Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the sockets core color of the X30 socket X31 socket bus cable for (ET-Connection (ET-Connection ET‑Connection OUT) yellow white blue orange...
  • Page 170 Edition 12/2022 SYSTEM MANUAL SIMATIC ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 171 ET 200AL IO-Link I/O Modules Guide System overview SIMATIC Application planning ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules Mounting System Manual Connecting Configuring Commissioning Maintenance Technical specifications Safety-related shutdown of ET 200AL IO-Link modules Dimension drawings Accessories/spare parts 12/2022 A5E48755395-AC...
  • Page 173 Preface Purpose of the documentation This documentation provides you with important information on how to configure, install, wire and commission the IO-Link I/O modules of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. Basic knowledge required A basic knowledge of automation technology is required to understand the documentation. Validity of the documentation This documentation applies to the IO-Link I/O modules of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
  • Page 174 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 175 This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/). Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP).
  • Page 176 Table of contents ET 200AL IO-Link I/O Modules Guide....................179 Information classes ET 200AL IO-Link I/O Module............179-897 Basic tools........................180 S7 Port Configuration Tool (S7-PCT)................181,2067 SIMATIC Technical Documentation..................182 System overview..........................184 System overview....................... 184 What are ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules?................185 Components........................
  • Page 177 Table of contents Maintenance............................218 Replacing modules......................218 Firmware update......................219 Resetting a module......................220 Maintaining/cleaning the modules..................222 Technical specifications........................223 Standards and authorizations.................... 224 Electromagnetic compatibility................... 227 Transport and storage conditions..................228 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions..............229 Details on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage....
  • Page 178 The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules is divided into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). Basic information The System Manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL IO-Link distributed I/O system.
  • Page 179 You can find SIEMENS PRONETA Basic on the Internet: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624) SIEMENS PRONETA Professional is a licensed product that offers you additional functions. It offers you simple asset management in PROFINET networks and supports operators of IO-Link I/O modules...
  • Page 180 (https://www.siemens.com/proneta-professional) SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves.
  • Page 181 Online Support: Industry Online Support International https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742705 Watch this short video to find out where you can find the overview directly in Siemens Industry Online Support and how to use Siemens Industry Online Support on your mobile device: Quick introduction to the technical documentation of automation products per video ( https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/109780491...
  • Page 182 The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system - separated from the focus on individual products. You can find the application examples on the Internet. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/ae) IO-Link I/O modules System Manual, 12/2022, A5E48755395-AC...
  • Page 183 System overview System overview Introduction A continuous communication down to the lowest field level ensures enhanced use of the functions and performance capability of sensors and actuators. Enhanced use of sensors and actuators allows you to operate your machines and plants more productively. No data other than the actual process value can be exchanged via the standard interfaces (digital, analog) used at the sensor/actuator level.
  • Page 184 System overview 2.2 What are ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules? What are ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules? SIMATIC ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules SIMATIC ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules belong to the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. You can operate the IO-Link I/O modules on any IO-Link master with IP20 or IP67 degree of protection.
  • Page 185 System overview 2.3 Components Area of application The SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system is especially well-suited for the following application areas: • Where space is limited • Moving applications • Assembly and handling technology Thanks to its scalable construction, you have the option to precisely customize its configuration to your on site needs.
  • Page 186 System overview 2.3 Components Component Function View Power connecting cable • Connection of additional load voltage M12-L Sealing cap M8 and M12 • Seal for unused connections • IP degree of protection is maintained through use Y-cable • Double connection of actuators or sensors to one socket •...
  • Page 187 You can find information on the maximum infeed current in the technical specifications of the modules in the respective equipment manuals or on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). Configuration of IO-Link I/O modules Each ET 200AL IO-Link I/O module has an M12 A-coded plug for connection to an IO-Link master.
  • Page 188 Application planning 3.2 Configuration of IO-Link I/O modules Connection examples The following figure shows a connection example using an S7-1500 IO-Link master with IP20 degree of protection. Figure 1-47  Configuration with IP20 IO-Link master The following figure shows a connection example on an ET 200ecoPN IO-Link master with IP65/67 degree of protection.
  • Page 189 Mounting Basics Introduction The IO-Link I/O modules are designed for IP65/IP67 degree of protection. This means that you can mount the modules directly in your plant. Mounting position You can mount the IO-Link I/O modules in any mounting position. Minimum clearances Maintain a minimum clearance of 2 cm from adjacent modules or other devices when mounting.
  • Page 190 Mounting 4.2 Mounting modules Mounting modules Introduction The IO-Link I/O modules are designed for mounting on a level, stable surface. Thanks to the axisymmetrical drill holes in the modules, you have the option to fasten the modules on an aluminum profile using tee nuts. The following images shows the aluminum profile on which you can mount the modules.
  • Page 191 4.2 Mounting modules Mounting 30 mm wide I/O modules (front or side) Watch video sequence (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95886672) The 30 mm I/O modules have a fastening point at the top and bottom. The 30 mm wide I/O modules can also be side-fastened. When fastening them at the side, you must use the supplied spacers.
  • Page 192 Mounting 4.2 Mounting modules Mounting 45 mm I/O modules (front mounting) Watch video sequence (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95886672) The 45 mm wide I/O modules have a fastening point at the top and bottom. Follow the steps below to mount a 45 mm wide I/O module: 1. Drill two fastening holes with 4.5 mm diameter spaced 149.6 mm apart.
  • Page 193 Mounting 4.2 Mounting modules Fastening for cable ties All IO-Link I/O modules have integrated fastening points for cable ties. The fastening points are found on all four corners of the modules. The figure below shows the top left fastening point for 2.5 mm cable ties for fastening the cables.
  • Page 194 Connecting Rules and regulations for operation Introduction Depending on the area of application, the IO-Link I/O modules, as an integral component of a system, must adhere to special rules. This section gives an overview of the most important rules you must follow when integrating the IO-Link I/O modules in a plant or system.
  • Page 195 If there is a danger due to overvoltages, you must take lightning protection measures for internal lightning protection (e.g. lightning protection elements. You will find additional information in the Designing interference-free controllers (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59193566) function manual). • For 24 V DC supply: Ensure that there is an electrical protective separation of extra-low voltage (SELV/PELV) according to IEC 61010-2-201 or IEC 60950-1.
  • Page 196 – Line/wire break – Cross-circuit in the cable Reference Additional information can be found in the function manual Designing interference-free con­ trollers (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59193566). Operation of the IO-Link I/O modules on a grounded/ungrounded infeed Introduction Information on the overall configuration of the IO-Link I/O modules on a grounded infeed (TN-S system) is provided below.
  • Page 197 Connecting 5.2 Operation of the IO-Link I/O modules on a grounded/ungrounded infeed Supply voltages Provide the IO-Link master with an SELV/PELV 1L+ supply voltage. The SELV/PELV 2L+ load voltage is supplied via the M12-A connector with port class B or via the M12-L power connector.
  • Page 198 Connecting 5.2 Operation of the IO-Link I/O modules on a grounded/ungrounded infeed Overall configuration of IO-Link I/O modules The figure below shows the overall electrical configuration using the example of an IO-Link I/O module with port class A on an IO-Link master with port class A. IO-Link master IO-Link I/O module Port Class A...
  • Page 199 Connecting 5.2 Operation of the IO-Link I/O modules on a grounded/ungrounded infeed The figure below shows the overall electrical configuration using the example of an IO-Link I/O module with port class A or B on an IO-Link master with port class A. IO-Link I/O module Port Class A or B DATA...
  • Page 200 Connecting 5.2 Operation of the IO-Link I/O modules on a grounded/ungrounded infeed The figure below shows the overall electrical configuration using the example of an IO-Link I/O module with port class B on an IO-Link master with port class B. IO-Link master IO-Link I/O module Port Class B...
  • Page 201 Connecting 5.2 Operation of the IO-Link I/O modules on a grounded/ungrounded infeed Components and protective measures Various components and protective measures are stipulated for setting up a complete plant. The types of components and the degree to which the protective measures are mandatory depend on the IEC regulation that applies to your plant setup.
  • Page 202 Connecting 5.3 Electrical configuration of the IO-Link I/O modules Electrical configuration of the IO-Link I/O modules Electrical isolation In the electrical configuration of the IO-Link I/O modules, there is electrical isolation between: • IO-Link 1L+: Non-switched supply voltage (electronics/sensor/load supply): Electrically isolated from 2L+ (load voltage supply) •...
  • Page 203 Connecting 5.4 Connecting IO-Link I/O modules to functional ground Power supply of the configuration Up to two voltage groups are available for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system. • 1L+ via IO-Link (supply voltage / non-switched) • 2L+ via port class B or M12-L power connector (load voltage / switched) NOTE Connecting and disconnecting of 1L+ IO-Link, 2L+ via port class B or M12-L power connector...
  • Page 204 Connecting 5.4 Connecting IO-Link I/O modules to functional ground 5.4.1 Mounting IO-Link I/O modules on a conductive surface Requirement Conductive surface for mounting of the module Required tool To connect to functional ground, you need the following tool: • Screwdriver or hexagon socket size 3 Required accessories: To connect to functional ground, you need the following accessories: •...
  • Page 205 Connecting 5.4 Connecting IO-Link I/O modules to functional ground 5.4.2 Mounting IO-Link I/O modules on a non-conductive surface Requirement Non-conductive surface for mounting of the module Required tool To connect to functional ground, you need the following tool: • Screwdriver or hexagon socket size 3 •...
  • Page 206 Connecting 5.4 Connecting IO-Link I/O modules to functional ground Mounting To connect IO-Link I/O modules to functional ground, proceed as follows: 1. Drill two fastening holes. 2. Strip the grounding cable. 3. Fasten the cable lug to the grounding cable. 4.
  • Page 207 Connecting 5.5 Wiring Wiring Connection Connect all cables to the front side of the modules: • IO-Link to the 5-pole M12 connector (A-coded) • Signal lines to the 3-pole M8 sockets or 4/5-pole M12 sockets (A-coded) • Additional load voltage to the 5-pole M12 plug (L-coded) Requirement Wire the modules with the supply voltage off.
  • Page 208 Connecting 5.5 Wiring Connecting M8 connectors To connect M8 connectors, proceed as follows: 1. Insert the plug into the respective round socket on the module. Ensure the correct alignment between plug and socket. 2. Tighten the connector using the knurled screw with a torque of 0.4 Nm. The figure below shows the connection of the M8 plugs, using the example of the IO-Link digital input module DI 8x24VDC 8xM8..
  • Page 209 5.5 Wiring Pin assignment of the sockets The pin assignment of the sockets can be found in the equipment manuals of the I/O modules (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14247/man) in the section on pin assignment and on the side surface of the module. Y-cable The Y-cable allows you to connect two actuators or sensors to the inputs or outputs.
  • Page 210 Connecting 5.6 Marking of IO-Link I/O modules See also Interface modules (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14246/man) Marking of IO-Link I/O modules 5.6.1 Factory markings Introduction For better orientation, the IO-Link I/O modules are furnished with various markings that support you when configuring and connecting the modules.
  • Page 211 Connecting 5.6 Marking of IO-Link I/O modules 5.6.2 Optional markings Introduction In addition to the factory markings, there are also optional possibilities for labeling or marking interfaces and modules on the IO-Link I/O modules. Identification label The identification labels come with each IO-Link I/O module as strips and can be machine- printed.
  • Page 212 Connecting 5.6 Marking of IO-Link I/O modules 5.6.3 Mounting identification labels Introduction This section describes how to mount or remove identification labels. Required tools You need a screwdriver with 3 mm blade width (only to remove identification labels). Mounting procedure To mount an identification label, proceed as follows: 1.
  • Page 213 The structure of the IODD is identical for all devices from all manufacturers. The structure of the IODD is always represented in the same manner by the IO-Link configuration tools of the master manufacturer (for Siemens, S7-PCT). This ensures that the handling is the same for all IO-Link devices regardless of the manufacturer.
  • Page 214 This means the IO-Link configuration tool supports the transparent representation of the IO-Link system down to field level. Siemens provides S7-PCT for engineering of the IO-Link system. You can find the relevant device description file, software and function manuals in SIOS.
  • Page 215 Configuring 6.2 IODD and Port Configuration Tool - S7-PCT S7-PCT with IODD of an IO-Link I/O module The following figure shows a section from S7-PCT with IODD of an IO-Link I/O module and the device information contained therein. Figure 1-62  S7-PCT with IODD of a device and the device information contained therein IO-Link I/O modules System Manual, 12/2022, A5E48755395-AC...
  • Page 216 Commissioning Startup of the IO-Link I/O module Principle of operation The figure below shows the startup of an IO-Link I/O module on an IO-Link Master schematically as a flow chart. Figure 1-63  Startup of an ET 200AL IO-Link I/O module IO-Link I/O modules System Manual, 12/2022, A5E48755395-AC...
  • Page 217 Maintenance Replacing modules Replacing IO-Link I/O modules The replacement of a module is not permitted during ongoing operation. WARNING Property damage can occur If you remove/insert modules while the power is connected, this can lead to undefined states in your system. The IO-Link I/O module may be damaged as a result.
  • Page 218 Maintenance 8.2 Firmware update 6. Connect all cables. 7. Turn the supply voltage on. WARNING Observe the device number of the modules If you mix up the IO-Link I/O modules when connecting them, this can cause personal injury and property damage. We recommend that you clearly label the IO-Link I/O modules with the device number.
  • Page 219 Maintenance 8.3 Resetting a module Option for the firmware update You have the option of performing a firmware update online via S7-PCT. Reference You will find additional information on the procedure in the "Help" > "Help topics" tab in S7-PCT. Enter "Firmware" in the search field and confirm with Enter. Resetting a module Introduction With "Restore Factory Setting", the IO-Link I/O module is set to the delivery condition.
  • Page 220 Maintenance 8.3 Resetting a module Requirement An online connection must exist to reset an IO-Link I/O device. Procedure using S7-PCT Connect the PG/PC to the PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP interface of the IO-Link master or to your system. Make sure that an online connection to the IO-Link I/O module exists. 1.
  • Page 221 Maintenance 8.4 Maintaining/cleaning the modules Maintaining/cleaning the modules Maintenance The IO-Link I/O modules are maintenance-free. NOTE Repairs Repairs to an IO-Link I/O module may only be carried out by the manufacturer. Cleaning When wired, the IO-Link I/O modules comply with degree of protection IP65/IP67 and do not require any cleaning.
  • Page 222 The technical data of the individual modules can be found in the modules' manuals. If there are discrepancies between the statements in this document and the product manuals, the statements in the product manuals take priority. See also SIOS (https://support.industry.siemens.com) IO-Link I/O modules System Manual, 12/2022, A5E48755395-AC...
  • Page 223 • 2011/65/EU "Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment" (RoHS Directive) The EU Declarations of Conformity are available for the authorities in charge and are kept at the following address: SIEMENS AG Digital Industries DI FA TI COS TT P.O. Box 1963...
  • Page 224 Technical specifications 9.1 Standards and authorizations The UK declarations of conformity are also available for download from the Siemens Industry Online Support website, under the keyword "Declaration of Conformity". UL approval Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with • UL 61010-1 and UL 61010-2-201 •...
  • Page 225 • LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping) • RINA (Registro Italiano Navale) The article numbers of the approved I/O modules for the respective classification society is available here (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14245/cert?ct=446). Industrial use The ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules are designed for the industrial environment. The following standards are met for this: •...
  • Page 226 Technical specifications 9.2 Electromagnetic compatibility Electromagnetic compatibility Definition Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of an electrical apparatus to function in a satisfactory manner in its electromagnetic environment without affecting this environment. The ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules fulfill the requirements of the EMC law of the European Single Market.
  • Page 227 Technical specifications 9.3 Transport and storage conditions Emission of radio frequency interference The table below shows the interference emission of electromagnetic fields according to EN 55011: limit class A, group 1. Table 1-59  Interference emission of electromagnetic fields Frequency Interference emission Measuring dis­ tance 30 ... 230 MHz <40 dB (µV/m) Q 10 m...
  • Page 228 You can find the values for the operating conditions in the technical specifications of the equipment manuals or on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/109742718). Tests for mechanical ambient conditions The following table shows the type and scope of the tests for mechanical ambient conditions.
  • Page 229 Technical specifications 9.5 Details on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage Details on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage Insulation The insulation is designed in compliance with the requirements of IEC 61010-2-201. NOTE For modules with 24 V DC supply voltage (SELV/PELV), electrical isolations are tested with 707 V DC (type test).
  • Page 230 Technical specifications 9.6 Safety-related symbols for IP65/IP67 modules Rated voltage for operation The following table shows the rated voltage and the corresponding tolerance with which the ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules operate. Table 1-64  Rated voltage for operation Rated voltage (SELV/PELV) Tolerance range 18 ... 30 V DC 20.4 ... 28.8 V DC Safety-related symbols for IP65/IP67 modules...
  • Page 231 Safety-related shutdown of ET 200AL IO-Link modules Introduction The following structure describes how to shut down ET 200AL IO-Link modules in a fail-safe manner. In the configuration shown in the diagram below (e.g. with the safety shutdown device 3SK1), all digital outputs that are connected to the 2L+ and 2M supply (24 V switched) of the ET 200AL IO-Link modules are switched to the safe OFF state.
  • Page 232 Safety-related shutdown of ET 200AL IO-Link modules Block diagram ① 5-wire cable for a Port Class B connection ② 3-wire cable for a Port Class A connection Figure 1-66  Higher-level safety circuit of the outputs WARNING Note potential groups for safety-related shutdown When a digital output is connected to a digital input, pay attention to the potential groups.
  • Page 233 You can find more information on safe SELV/PELV in the data sheets of the power supplies used. Read the latest information on safety-related shutdown in the FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/39198632). In this FAQ, you can find the SIMATIC standard modules that are suitable for safety-related shutdown.
  • Page 234 Safety-related shutdown of ET 200AL IO-Link modules Request German Technical Inspectorate report (Report no. SN89858T) You can request copies of the German Technical Inspectorate report at the following address: SIEMENS AG Digital Industries DI FA TI COS TT P.O. Box 1963...
  • Page 235 Dimension drawings Two module widths are available for the IO-Link I/O modules. The figure below shows the height and width of the modules. The depth of the modules varies between 40 mm and 45 mm. Detailed information on the dimensions of the individual modules can be found in the equipment manuals for the IO-Link I/O modules in the section "Dimension drawing".
  • Page 236 Accessories/spare parts 12.1 Accessories/spare parts Accessories for the ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules Table 1-65  Accessories for connection to an IO-Link master Designation Length Article number Cable is pre-assembled M12 CONNECTING CABLE, A-CODED 0.5 m 6XV1801-2CE50 ET 200 1.0 m 6XV1801-2CH10 Pre-assembled cable with M12 plug and M12 socket, 1.5 m 6XV1801-2CH15 A-coded, 5-pole, 5 x 0.25...
  • Page 237 Sealing cap M12 for modules IP67 3RX9802‑0AA00 Online catalog Additional article numbers for the ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules can be found on the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com) in the online catalog and online ordering system. 12.2 UL-approved cables UL-approved cables from PHOENIX CONTACT In combination with the named cables of the manufacturer PHOENIX CONTACT, the IO-Link I/O modules of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system meet the requirements for UL...
  • Page 238 UL-approved cables from Siemens In combination with the named cables for the connection of DI/DQ of the manufacturer Siemens, the IO-Link I/O modules of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O devices meet the requirements for UL approval. Table 1-72  Accessories for DI/DQ connection...
  • Page 239 Accessories/spare parts 12.2 UL-approved cables Designation Length Article number Power connecting cable M12-180/M12-180 for power supply of ET 200, 5.0 m 6XV1801-5DH50 pre-assembled cable with M12 plug and M12 socket, A-coded, 5-pole 10.0 m 6XV1801-5DN10 15.0 m 6XV1801-5DN15 Power connecting cable M12-90/M12-90 for power supply of ET 200, 0.3 m 6XV1801-5GE30 pre-assembled cable with M12 plug and M12 socket, A-coded, 5-pole...
  • Page 240 – CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (V2.0 or higher) – CPU 1512SP-1 PN (V2.0 or higher) – CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (V2.0 or higher) • BaseUnit BU-Send with BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC • ET-Connection cable • Power cable Siemens AG 2014 - 2016. All rights reserved A5E33344611-AC, 02/2016...
  • Page 241 Rules You must observe the following rules when assembling a mixed configuration: The bus length of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system must not exceed 1 m • (without interface module, including BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC and server module) • A maximum of 16 ET 200AL I/O modules can be connected to ET-Connection. •...
  • Page 242 Mounting Introduction For the connection of the ET 200AL I/O module via ET-Connection to the ET 200SP, you require the BaseUnit BU-Send with the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC. Requirement The mounting rail is mounted. • • The interface module is mounted. Required tools 3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only for dismantling the BusAdapter) Mounting BaseUnit BU-Send...
  • Page 243 Connection Introduction You connect the ET 200AL I/O modules via the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC using ET-Connection. ① BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC ② Connection element for ET-Connection bus cable Figure 3  BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC Required tools Screwdriver with 3 to 3.5 mm blade Required accessories Use the bus cable for ET-Connection as connecting cable between the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC and the ET 200AL I/O modules.
  • Page 244 5. Close the cover of the connection element and push the locking slide forward. 6. Connect and screw the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC to the BaseUnit BU-Send (1 screw with 0.2 Nm tightening torque.) To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade. 7.
  • Page 245 BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC mounted ① BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC ② Bus cable for ET-Connection Figure 6  BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC mounted Product Information A5E33344611-AC, 02/2016...
  • Page 246 Configuring Introduction The mixed configuration allows the connection of up to 16 ET 200AL I/O modules to the ET 200SP via ET-Connection. The figure below shows the configuration of the ET-Connection and the assignment of the slots. ① ET 200SP I/O modules ⑤...
  • Page 247 Rules Observe the following rules when configuring: With mixed configurations, the following maximum configuration is possible: • – 31 (IM 155-6 DP HF and IM 155-6 PN ST)/63 (IM 155-6 PN HF and CPUs) slots for ET 200SP modules – 16 slots for ET 200AL I/O modules –...
  • Page 248 Configuration example An example of a mixed configuration is shown below: Hardware configuration ① ET 200SP I/O modules ⑥ 2nd ET 200AL I/O module ② ET 200SP server module ⑦ 3rd ET 200AL I/O module ③ Slots ⑧ 4th ET 200AL I/O module ④...
  • Page 249 Configuring configuration example Table 1-73  Overview Mixed configura­ Module Slot tion ET 200SP IM 155‑6 PN HF BA-Send 1xFC DI 16×24VDC ST DI 16×24VDC ST DI 16×24VDC ST Server module ET 200AL DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 8xM8 AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 NOTE Configuration using PROFIBUS GSD file When you use the PROFIBUS GSD file for the configuration, you must configure the gaps between the server module and the first ET 200AL I/O module with BU-Cover.
  • Page 250 BaseUnit BU-Send Product overview Article number 6ES7193‑6BN00‑0NE0 View Figure 9  BaseUnit BU-Send Properties BaseUnit suitable for BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC Product Information A5E33344611-AC, 02/2016...
  • Page 251 Connection Pin assignment The BaseUnit BU-Send has only one slot for an expansion module. No other connections are available. Schematic circuit diagram ① Backplane bus ② BA-Send 1xFC expansion module Figure 10  Schematic circuit diagram BU-Send Technical specifications Technical specifications of the BaseUnit BU-Send XE TDB_S 6ES7193-6BN00-0NE0 Product type designation XE T:0...
  • Page 252 Connects the interface module via ET-Connection with the ET 200AL I/O modules • Supports all ET 200AL I/O modules • The module supports the following functions: • ET 200SP Distributed I/O System Identification data I&M 0 to 3. See system manual http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293 Product Information A5E33344611-AC, 02/2016...
  • Page 253 • See also You can find more information on accessories and additional components in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965 system manual. Pin assignment ET-Connection with BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC The following table shows the signal names and the designations for the pin assignment of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC.
  • Page 254 Schematic circuit diagram Schematic circuit diagram Figure 12  Schematic circuit diagram for BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC Diagnostics by means of LED display LED display The figure below shows the LED display (status and fault display) of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC. ① DIAG (green/red) Figure 13  LED display Meaning of the LED display The table below explains the meaning of the status and fault display.
  • Page 255 DIAG LED Table 1-75  Status and fault display DIAG DIAG LED Meaning Remedy There is no connection between the Check whether the bus cable is interrupted. ET-Connection interface of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC and ET 200AL. The interface module does not support Run a firmware update.
  • Page 256 Product Information Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement – and continuously maintain –...
  • Page 257 Figure 1  Higher-level safety circuit with safety relay Requesting TÜV certificate (report no. SN89858T, revision 1.0 dated 18 August 2016) TÜV certificate You can request copies of the TÜV certificate and the accompanying report at the following address: Siemens AG Digital Factory DF FA AS DH AMB...
  • Page 258 Equipment Manual SIMATIC ET 200AL Interface module IM 157-1 DP (6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0) Edition 08/2021 support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 259 ET 200AL Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL IM 157-1 DP Parameters (6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0) Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications Dimension drawing Cycle times 08/2021 A5E32100641-AE...
  • Page 261 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 262 Table of contents ET 200AL Documentation Guide......................18 Product overview......................... 268,454 Properties........................268,454 Operator controls and display elements................270 Functions........................271,685 2.3.1 PROFIBUS DP......................271,685 2.3.2 Configuration control (option handling)................272 Wiring............................273,816 Terminal and block diagram....................273 Pin assignment......................... 274 Configuring PROFIBUS DP address and terminating resistor..........
  • Page 263 ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). Manual Collection ET 200AL The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 264 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 265 You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 266 ET 200AL Documentation Guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves.
  • Page 267 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0 View of the module Figure 2-1  View of the IM 157-1 DP interface module IM 157-1 DP (6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E32100641-AE...
  • Page 268 • M8 sealing cap • M12 sealing cap See also You will find additional information on accessories and the other components in the Accessories/Spare parts section of the ET 200AL Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual. IM 157-1 DP (6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E32100641-AE...
  • Page 269 Product overview 2.2 Operator controls and display elements Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator control and display elements of the interface module IM 157-1 DP. ① RUN, ERROR, MAINT: LED displays for the current operating status and diagnostics status ②...
  • Page 270 DP master and the DP slaves. Reference You will find more information on PROFIBUS DP in the STEP 7 online help and in the Function Manual PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193579). IM 157-1 DP (6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E32100641-AE...
  • Page 271 Reference You can find more information on configuration control • In the system manual ET 200AL Distributed I/O System (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965) • On the Internet under the following link: Application collection (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/29430270). • In the STEP 7 online help.
  • Page 272 Wiring Terminal and block diagram The image below shows the terminal and block diagram of the IM 157‑1 DP interface module. ① Electronics Supply voltage 1L+ (non-switched) ② ET-Connection interface Ground 1M (non-switched) ③ Internal supply voltage Load voltage 2L+ (switched) ④ Rotary coding switch for PROFIBUS addresses Ground 2M (switched) X1 DP1...
  • Page 273 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment NOTE Color coding The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables. Pin assignment of the sockets for PROFIBUS The following table shows the pin assignment of the connectors and sockets for the connection of PROFIBUS.
  • Page 274 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The following table shows the pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage. Table 2-3  Pin assignment of the supply voltage connector Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the wire color of the...
  • Page 275 Wiring 3.3 Configuring PROFIBUS DP address and terminating resistor Configuring PROFIBUS DP address and terminating resistor Properties Use the PROFIBUS address to specify at which address the ET 200AL distributed I/O system is addressed on the PROFIBUS DP. The PROFIBUS DP address is configured for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system with a rotary coding switch on the front of the housing.
  • Page 276 Wiring 3.3 Configuring PROFIBUS DP address and terminating resistor The figure below shows the rotary coding switches for configuring the PROFIBUS DP address. ① Rotary coding switch for PROFIBUS DP (tens digit) ② Rotary coding switch for PROFIBUS DP address (ones digit) Figure 2-4  Setting the PROFIBUS address The following table shows how to set PROFIBUS address 26 as an example.
  • Page 277 Wiring 3.3 Configuring PROFIBUS DP address and terminating resistor Connecting the terminating resistor for PROFIBUS DP Terminate a PROFIBUS DP segment, on both of its ends, which means on the first and last device of the segment, with its characteristic impedance. There are two different terminating resistors available for this purpose, for sockets and for connectors.
  • Page 278 Parameters Parameters The following table shows the parameters for the IM 157-1 DP interface module. Table 2-6  Parameters Parameters Value range Default Efficiency range Configuration control • Disable Disable ET 200AL • Enable Startup if preset configuration does • Disable Disable ET 200AL not match actual configuration •...
  • Page 279 Parameters 4.2 Explanation of the parameters Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration Enabled parameter If the preset/actual configuration differ, a data exchange occurs between the DP master and the ET 200AL distributed I/O system. Disabled parameter If the preset/actual configuration differ, no data exchange occurs between the DP master and the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
  • Page 280 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the IM 157-1 DP interface module. ① (green) ② ERROR (red) ③ MAINT (yellow) ④ ET-CON1 (green) ⑤...
  • Page 281 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables set out the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 293). LED RUN, LED ERROR, LED MAINT Table 2-7  Status and error displays of the LEDs RUN, ERROR, MAINT LEDs...
  • Page 282 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts DP LED Table 2-8  Status display of the DP LED DP LED Meaning Solution There is no connection between the Check whether the bus cable to the DP mas­ PROFIBUS interface of your PROFIBUS ter is disconnected.
  • Page 283 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts 5.2.2 Trigger a diagnostics interrupt For an incoming or outgoing event (for example, wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the interface module triggers a diagnostics interrupt if the I/O modules were configured accordingly and "Enable:diagnostics interrupt"...
  • Page 284 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts Data records The diagnostics data of a module are located in the data records 0 and 1: • Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data that describe the current status of the distributed I/O system.
  • Page 285 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts The figure below shows the structure of data record 1. Figure 2-8  Structure of data record 1 Reading data records You have the option to read out data records 0 and 1 via SFC 59 (RD_REC) or SFB 52 (RDREC). The data length of data record 1 is up to 240 bytes.
  • Page 286 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts Contents The contents of the interrupt information depend on the interrupt type: • In the case of diagnostics interrupts, diagnostics data record 1 (up to 58 bytes) is sent as interrupt status information (starting from byte x+4). •...
  • Page 287 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts Diagnostics interrupt, byte x+4 to x+7 The figure below shows the structure of the diagnostics interrupt of byte x+4 to byte x+7. Figure 2-10  Structure of bytes x+4 to x+7 for diagnostics interrupt IM 157-1 DP (6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E32100641-AE...
  • Page 288 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts Diagnostics interrupt, starting at byte x+8 The figure below shows the structure of the diagnostics interrupt starting at byte x+8. Figure 2-11  Structure starting at byte x+8 Diagnostics interrupt from the modules, starting at byte x+14 The channel error entries start from byte x+14.
  • Page 289 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts The following table is used to explain the channel error entries. Description Channel number 0 … 63: Channel number for channel error 0x8000: Entire submodule Channel properties Bits 0 to 7 : Free data type : bit : 2 bit...
  • Page 290 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts Example of a diagnostics interrupt The figure below shows an example of a diagnostics interrupt. Figure 2-13  Example of a diagnostics interrupt (part 1) IM 157-1 DP (6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E32100641-AE...
  • Page 291 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2 Interrupts Figure 2-14  Example of a diagnostics interrupt (part 2) Hardware interrupt of digital and analog input modules, bytes x+4 to x+7 The figure below shows the structure of a hardware interrupt. Figure 2-15  Structure as of Byte x+4 for hardware interrupt NOTE Byte x+4 You will find the event type in the device manual of the module that triggered the hardware...
  • Page 292 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms Alarms 5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms Actions after a diagnostics alarm in DPV1 mode The error is entered in the channel diagnostics in the diagnostics frame: • In DPV1 mode, diagnostics can be reported as diagnostics interrupts. •...
  • Page 293 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.2 Slave diagnostics The figure below shows the structure of the slave diagnostics. Figure 2-16  Structure of the slave diagnostics NOTE The length of the diagnostics frame varies with the IM 157‑1 DP (depending on parameter assignment) between 6 and 244 bytes in DPV1 mode.
  • Page 294 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.3 Station statuses 1 to 3 The following tables show station status 1 to 3 and provide an overview of the status of a DP slave. Structure of station status 1 (byte 0) Table 2-11  Structure of station status 1 (byte 0) Meaning Cause/Solution 1: The DP slave is not responding to the DP...
  • Page 295 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms Structure of station status 2 (byte 1) Table 2-12  Structure of station status 2 (byte 1) Meaning 1: The DP slave parameters need to be reassigned. 1: A diagnostics alarm is pending. The DP slave will not operate until the problem is elim­ inated (static diagnostics alarm).
  • Page 296 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.6 Identifier-related diagnostics The identifier-related diagnostics indicates whether modules of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system have errors or not. Identifier-related diagnostics starts at byte 6 and comprises 6 bytes. The figure below shows how the identifier-related diagnostics for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system is structured with the IM 157‑1 DP interface module.
  • Page 297 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.7 Module status The module status indicates the status of the configured modules and provides more information on the identifier-related diagnostics with respect to the configuration. The module status begins after the identifier-related diagnostics and comprises 13 bytes. The figure below shows how the module status for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system is structured with the IM 157‑1 DP interface module.​...
  • Page 298 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.8 Channel diagnostics Function Channel diagnostics provides information about channel errors in modules and details of the identifier-related diagnostics. Channel diagnostics begins after the module status. Channel diagnostics does not affect the module status. The figure below shows how the channel diagnostics for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system is structured with the IM 157‑1 DP interface module.
  • Page 299 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the interface module IM 157-1 DP The following table shows the technical specifications as of the issue date. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0 General information  ...
  • Page 300 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0 1. Interface   Interface type PROFIBUS DP Interface types   • RS 485 M12 port Yes; 2x M12 B-coded • Protocols   • PROFIBUS DP slave Interface types   RS 485   Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbit/s •...
  • Page 301 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0 Highest safety class achievable for safety-   related tripping of standard modules • Performance level according to ISO PL d 13849-1 • Category according to ISO 13849-1 Cat. 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 •...
  • Page 302 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the IM 157-1 DP interface module in the front and side view. Figure 2-20  Dimension drawing IM 157-1 DP (6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E32100641-AE...
  • Page 303 Cycle times The following figure shows the cycle times at ET-Connection based on the number of I/O modules. Figure 2-21  Cycle times The cycle time is independent of the PROFIBUS transmission rate. IM 157-1 DP (6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E32100641-AE...
  • Page 304 Manual SIMATIC ET 200AL Interface module IM 157-1 PN (6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0) Edition 05/2021 support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 305 ET 200AL Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL IM 157-1 PN Parameters (6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0) Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications Dimension drawing Cycle times 05/2021 A5E32347036-AE...
  • Page 307 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 308 Table of contents ET 200AL Documentation Guide......................310 Product overview..........................314 Properties......................... 314 Operator controls and display elements..............316,1984 Functions......................... 317 2.3.1 PROFINET IO........................317 2.3.2 PROFIenergy........................320 2.3.2.1 What is PROFlenergy?......................320 2.3.2.2 Principle of operation......................321 2.3.2.3 Parameter assignment ..................... 323 2.3.2.4 PROFIenergy control data records..................
  • Page 309 ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). Manual Collection ET 200AL The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 310 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 311 You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 312 ET 200AL Documentation Guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves.
  • Page 313 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0 View of the module Figure 2-22  View of the IM 157-1 PN interface module Properties The module has the following technical properties: • Connects the ET 200AL distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO • 24 V DC supply voltage • Support for 2 ET-Connection lines •...
  • Page 314 • M8 sealing cap • M12 sealing cap See also You will find additional information on accessories and the other components in the Accessories/Spare parts section of the ET 200AL Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual. IM 157-1 PN (6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 05/2021, A5E32347036-AE...
  • Page 315 Product overview 2.2 Operator controls and display elements Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator control and display elements of the interface module IM 157-1 PN. ① RUN, ERROR, MAINT: LED displays for the current operating status and diagnostics status ②...
  • Page 316 Product overview 2.3 Functions Functions 2.3.1 PROFINET IO Introduction The interface module supports the following PROFINET IO functions: • Integrated switch with 2 ports • Supported Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP)/MIB-2, LLDP • Port diagnostics • Deactivating of ports •...
  • Page 317 Product overview 2.3 Functions Real-time communication A transmission method for PROFINET IO based on a cyclic data exchange with a provider- consumer model. Isochronous real-time communication Synchronized transmission method for cyclic exchange of IRT data between PROFINET devices. A reserved bandwidth within the send clock is available for IRT data. The reserved bandwidth ensures that IRT data can be transferred at reserved synchronized intervals, without being influenced by other higher network loads (e.g., TCP/IP communication, or additional real-time communication).
  • Page 318 IO device to the delivery state with "Reset to factory settings". You will find more information on "Resetting to factory settings" in the ET 200AL Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual in the section "Resetting interface module (PROFINET) to factory settings".
  • Page 319 • Device manuals I/O modules (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14247/man) • System manual PROFINET System Description (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/19292127) • PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856), function manual, section: Saving energy with PROFIenergy • Application guide for implementation of shutdown concepts with PROFIenergy. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/96837137) IM 157-1 PN (6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0)
  • Page 320 Product overview 2.3 Functions • Saving energy with SIMATIC S7 (STEP 7 as of V5.5) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454) • Saving energy with SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI (TIA Portal) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58235225) • SIMATIC S7 library for simple configuration of PROFIenergy. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478388) • You will find additional information on the PROFIenergy FBs ("PE_START_END" - FB 815, "PE_CMD"...
  • Page 321 Product overview 2.3 Functions Response to error detection All channels whose pause mode is set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" report errors as in productive operation. The following rules apply to channels which switch to a pause mode other than "PE_MODE_PROCEED": • All errors that are unrelated to the switch to "Pause" are reported. •...
  • Page 322 Product overview 2.3 Functions Ending a "Pause" Explanation Station stop The "pause" is exited , the PROFIenergy parameter assignment is still on the I/O module and the "pause" can • Removing an I/O module be re-activated by the "Start_Pause" command. The supply voltage 1L+ of the I/O module has failed The parameter settings of the I/O module...
  • Page 323 Product overview 2.3 Functions Parameter data record You specify in the parameter data record for PROFIenergy which I/O modules (slots) are controlled with the PROFIenergy commands. The following table shows the content of the parameter data record for PROFIenergy, index 3, which you create yourself and can transfer to the interface module.
  • Page 324 Reference You can find more information on configuration control • In the system manual ET 200AL Distributed I/O System (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965) • On the Internet under the following link: Application collection (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/29430270). • In the STEP 7 online help.
  • Page 325 Wiring Terminal and block diagram The image below shows the terminal and block diagram of the IM 157‑1 PN interface module. ① Switch Supply voltage 1L+ (non-switched) ② Electronics Ground 1M (non-switched) ③ ET-Connection interface Load voltage 2L+ (switched) ④ Internal supply voltage Ground 2M (switched) X1 P1 R 1.
  • Page 326 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment NOTE Color coding The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables. Pin assignment of the sockets for PROFINET The following table shows the pin assignment of the two sockets for PROFINET. Table 2-20  Pin assignment of the PROFINET sockets Assignment Front view of the sockets...
  • Page 327 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Assignment Assignment of Front view of the sockets the wire color of X30 socket X31 socket the bus line cable (ET-Connection1) (ET-Connection2) for ET‑Connection Blue Orange Shield­ Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The following table shows the pin assignment for infeed of the supply voltage.
  • Page 328 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment CAUTION PROFINET IO Modules with PROFINET interfaces may only be operated under the following condition: All connected devices must be equipped with SELV/PELV power supplies. IM 157-1 PN (6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 05/2021, A5E32347036-AE...
  • Page 329 Parameters Parameters The following table shows the parameters for the IM 157-1 PN interface module. Table 2-24  Parameters (GSD file) Parameters Value range Default Efficiency range Configuration control • Disable Disable ET 200AL • Enable Explanation of the parameters Configuration control You can use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
  • Page 330 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the interface module IM 157-1 PN. ① (green) ② ERROR (red) ③ MAINT (yellow) ④ ET-CON1 (green) ⑤...
  • Page 331 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables set out the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 335). LED RUN, LED ERROR, LED MAINT Table 2-25  Status and error displays of the LEDs RUN, ERROR, MAINT LEDs...
  • Page 332 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.1 Status and error displays LED P1 LINK, LED P2 LINK Table 2-26  Status displays of the LEDs P1 LINK and P2 LINK LEDs Meaning Solution P1 LINK P2 LINK There is no connection between the Check whether the bus cable to the switch PROFINET interface of your PROFINET device or IO controller is disconnected.
  • Page 333 Independent of the cyclic user program, messages are made available on the display of the CPU S7-1500, the CPU web server and the HMI device. You will find more information on systemic diagnostics in the Function Manual Diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926). 5.2.2 Trigger a diagnostics interrupt...
  • Page 334 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.2.3 Triggering a hardware interrupt During a hardware interrupt, the CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the hardware interrupt OB (e.g., OB 40). The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the hardware interrupt OB.
  • Page 335 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24000238). Causes of error and troubleshooting Causes of errors and corrective measures of diagnostics alarms are described in the device manuals of the I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89013554) in the section Interrupt, Error and System Messages. IM 157-1 PN (6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 05/2021, A5E32347036-AE...
  • Page 336 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms 5.3.2 Maintenance events Triggering of a maintenance event The PROFINET IO interfaces of the interface module support the diagnostics concept and maintenance concept in PROFINET IO according to standard IEC 61158‑6‑10. The goal is the early recognition and correction of potential disruptions.
  • Page 337 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.3 Alarms Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records The structure of the diagnostics data records is differentiated by the BlockVersion. The following BlockVersion applies to the IM 157‑1 PN interface modules: Table 2-30  Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records IM 157‑1 PN interface module BlockVersion 6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0...
  • Page 338 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the interface module IM 157-1 PN The following table shows the technical specifications as of 05/2021. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0 General information  ...
  • Page 339 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0 1. Interface   Interface types   • M12 port Yes; 2x M12 D-coded integrated switch • Protocols   • PROFINET IO Device Open IE communication • M12 port   • Transmission procedure PROFINET with 100 Mbit/s full duplex (100BASE-TX) •...
  • Page 340 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0 Potential separation   between the load voltages between PROFINET and all other circuits Isolation   Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates   Suitable for safety-related tripping of standard Yes; From FS01 modules Highest safety class achievable for safety-  ...
  • Page 341 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the IM 157-1 PN interface module in the front and side view. Figure 2-26  Dimension drawing IM 157-1 PN (6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 05/2021, A5E32347036-AE...
  • Page 342 Cycle times The figure below shows the cycle times at ET-Connection based on the number of I/O modules with a PN send clock of 0.5 ms. Figure 2-27  Cycle times The cycle time at ET‑Connection is synchronized with the PROFINET send clock. This means that the input data of the I/O modules are transmitted via ET‑Connection without further delay (wait time in the interface module) via PROFINET.
  • Page 343 Edition 01/2024 EQUIPMENT MANUAL SIMATIC ET 200AL IM 157-1 MF Interface Module (6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0) support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 344 Introduction Industrial cybersecurity SIMATIC Product overview ET 200AL IM 157-1 MF Connecting (6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0) PROFINET IO Equipment Manual EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP Parameters Operation and maintenance Technical specifications Dimension drawing Cycle times 01/2024 A5E52816358-AA...
  • Page 346 Table of contents Introduction............................350 Introduction........................241 ET 200AL Guide........................ 351 1.2.1 Information classes ET 200AL.................... 351 1.2.2 Basic tools........................352 1.2.3 MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)................354 1.2.4 SIMATIC Technical Documentation..................355 Industrial cybersecurity........................357 Introduction to industrial cybersecurity................357 Cybersecurity information....................357 Cybersecurity-relevant information...................
  • Page 347 Table of contents 5.1.11 Interface local coupling of IO data..................380 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms..........382 5.2.1 Status and error displays for PROFINET IO................382 5.2.2 Interrupts......................... 385 5.2.2.1 Evaluating interrupts......................385 5.2.2.2 Trigger a diagnostics interrupt................... 385 5.2.2.3 Triggering a hardware interrupt..................
  • Page 348 Table of contents Cycle times............................418 IM 157-1 MF (6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 01/2024, A5E52816358-AA...
  • Page 349 Introduction Introduction Purpose of the documentation This Equipment Manual supplements the System Manual ET 200AL distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965). Functions that are generally applicable to the ET 200AL distributed I/O system are described there. The SIMATIC MultiFieldbus (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109773209) Function Manual describes general MultiFieldbus functions. This Equipment Manual describes the specific adaptations for this I/O device.
  • Page 350 This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667) Basic information The System Manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
  • Page 351 Manual Collection ET 200AL The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file. You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965) 1.2.2 Basic tools Tools The tools described below support you in all steps: from planning, over commissioning, all the way to analysis of your system.
  • Page 352 You can find SIEMENS PRONETA Basic on the Internet: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624) SIEMENS PRONETA Professional is a licensed product that offers you additional functions. It offers you simple asset management in PROFINET networks and supports operators of automation systems in automatic data collection/acquisition of the components used through various functions: •...
  • Page 353 MultiFieldbus- and DALI-devices. In addition, the MFCT offers convenient options for mass firmware updates of ET 200 devices with MultiFieldbus- support and reading service data for many other Siemens devices. Functional scope of the MFCT • MultiFieldbus configuration:...
  • Page 354 Online Support: Industry Online Support International https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742705 Watch this short video to find out where you can find the overview directly in Siemens Industry Online Support and how to use Siemens Industry Online Support on your mobile device: Quick introduction to the technical documentation of automation products per video ( https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/109780491...
  • Page 355 Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates • Product master data You can find "mySupport" on the Internet. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en) Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system - separated from the focus on individual products.
  • Page 356 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 357 Corrective measures for known risks Corrective measures for known risks are announced on the Siemens ProductCERT and Siemens CERT (https://siemens.com/productcert) web page. You can find more information on SIEMENS ProductCERT in the System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens. com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965). IM 157-1 MF (6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0)
  • Page 358 Security checks You can find a description of application-related security measures, such as cyclic checks of the configuration via checksums, in the System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens. com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965), Industrial cybersecurity sec­ tion. Secure decommissioning You can find information on secure decommissioning in the...
  • Page 359 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0 View of the module Figure 2-28  View of the IM 157-1 MF interface module IM 157-1 MF (6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 01/2024, A5E52816358-AA...
  • Page 360 Product overview 3.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: • Connects the ET 200AL distributed I/O system with these fieldbuses: – PROFINET IO – EtherNet/IP – Modbus TCP • 24 V DC supply voltage • Support for 2 ET-Connection lines •...
  • Page 361 • M12 sealing cap See also You will find more information on accessories and the other components in the System Manual ET 200AL distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965) in the Accessories/Spare parts section. IM 157-1 MF (6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 01/2024, A5E52816358-AA...
  • Page 362 Product overview 3.2 Operator controls and display elements Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator control and display elements of the IM 157-1 MF interface module. ① RN/NS, ER/MS, MT/IO: LED displays for the current operating state and diagnostic status ②...
  • Page 363 • Comma Separated Values (CSV), contains the I/O data mapping of your configuration You can find more information on MFCT in the "SIMATIC MultiFieldbus (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109773209)" Function Manual. Detect active fieldbus For exclusive operation on a fieldbus (not MF Shared Device) you can recognize the active fieldbus by the number of green LEDs on the MF device.
  • Page 364 Connecting Terminal and block diagram The figure below shows the connection and schematic circuit diagram of the IM 157‑1 MF interface module. ① Switch Supply voltage 1L+ (non-switched) ② Electronics Ground 1M (non-switched) ③ ET-Connection interface Load voltage 2L+ (switched) ④ Internal supply voltage Ground 2M (switched) X1 P1R 1st MultiFieldbus interface:...
  • Page 365 Connecting 4.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment NOTE Color coding The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables. Pin assignment of the MultiFieldbus sockets The following table shows the pin assignment of the 2 sockets for MultiFieldbus. Table 2-31  Pin assignment of the MultiFieldbus sockets Assignment Front view of the sockets...
  • Page 366 Connecting 4.2 Pin assignment Assignment Assignment of Front view of the sockets the wire color of X30 socket X31 socket the bus line cable (ET-Connection1) (ET-Connection2) for ET‑Connection Blue Orange Shield­ Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The following table shows the pin assignment for infeed of the supply voltage.
  • Page 367 Connecting 4.2 Pin assignment CAUTION MultiFieldbus Modules with MultiFieldbus interfaces may only be operated under the following condition: All connected devices must be equipped with SELV/PELV power supplies. IM 157-1 MF (6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 01/2024, A5E52816358-AA...
  • Page 368 PROFINET IO PROFINET IO functions 5.1.1 PROFINET IO Introduction The interface module supports the following PROFINET IO functions: • Integrated switch with 2 ports • Supported Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP)/MIB-2, LLDP • Port diagnostics • Deactivating of ports •...
  • Page 369 ET 200AL Distributed I/O System (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965). Reference You will find more information on the PROFINET IO functions in the Function Manual SIMATIC PROFINET with STEP 7 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) and in the STEP 7 online help. IM 157-1 MF (6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 01/2024, A5E52816358-AA...
  • Page 370 Otherwise, IRT and RT configured IO devices can fail if the sync master fails. Detailed information You can find additional information on the topic of isochronous real-time communication in the STEP 7 online help and in the SIMATIC PROFINET with STEP 7 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) function manual. IM 157-1 MF (6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 01/2024, A5E52816358-AA...
  • Page 371 You will receive invalid values with the value status QI = 0 until then. Detailed information You can find more information on the topic of Prioritized startup in the STEP 7 online help and in the Function Manual SIMATIC PROFINET with STEP 7 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856). 5.1.6 System redundancy S2 System redundancy S2 An IO device with S2 system redundancy supports redundant ARs.
  • Page 372 Detailed information You can find additional information on the topic of shared device in the STEP 7 online help and in the SIMATIC PROFINET with STEP 7 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) function manual. 5.1.8 Device replacement without programming device Device replacement without programming device IO devices with this function can easily be replaced.
  • Page 373 • Equipment Manuals ET 200AL I/O modules (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14247/man) • System Manual SIMATIC PROFINET System Description (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/19292127) • Function Manual SIMATIC PROFINET with STEP 7 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856), Section: Saving energy with PROFIenergy • Application guide for implementation of shutdown concepts with PROFIenergy. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/96837137) IM 157-1 MF (6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0)
  • Page 374 PROFINET IO 5.1 PROFINET IO functions • PROFIenergy - Saving Energy with SIMATIC S7 (STEP 7 V5.5) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454) • SIMATIC S7 Library for Easy Configuring of PROFIenergy (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478388) • You will find additional information on the PROFIenergy FBs ("PE_START_END" - FB 815, "PE_CMD"...
  • Page 375 PROFINET IO 5.1 PROFINET IO functions Additional information Additional information on diagnostics can be found in the I/O module device manuals. Hardware interrupt Ending a "Pause" causes hardware interrupts to be detected again. "Pause" behavior under certain operating conditions A "Pause" is ended in the following cases: Table 2-36  Ending a "Pause"...
  • Page 376 PROFINET IO 5.1 PROFINET IO functions 5.1.9.3 Parameter assignment Parameter assignment Keep the following points in mind when assigning parameters for PROFIenergy: • Parameters for PROFIenergy are assigned with the parameter data record (version 2), index 3. The interface module distributes the PROFIenergy parameters to the I/O modules. •...
  • Page 377 PROFINET IO 5.1 PROFINET IO functions Byte Element Code Explanation Block 1 Mode : PE_MODE_PROCEED, proceed at "Pause" : PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN, shut down at "Pause" : PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE, last output or measured value is retained : PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE, substitute value "0" Block 32 Slot number See Block 1 Mode...
  • Page 378 Reference You can find more information on configuration control • In the system manual ET 200AL Distributed I/O System (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965) • On the Internet under the following link: Application collection (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/29430270). • In the STEP 7 online help.
  • Page 379 PROFINET IO 5.1 PROFINET IO functions 5.1.11 Interface local coupling of IO data Module-internal shared output In this example, IO data are transferred from one controller to other controllers over the PROFINET interface X1 by means of the module-internal shared output. Figure 2-31  I/O data are transferred to other controllers in the same PROFINET network Configuration Table 2-40  Example of the configuration...
  • Page 380 PROFINET IO 5.1 PROFINET IO functions Editing in the user program The controller CPU 1 writes I/O data to the MSO Local OUT module with the virtual slot 1.1 of the interface module. The data is available to CPUs 2 to 4 for reading with the remaining MSO Local IN modules.
  • Page 381 PROFINET IO 5.2 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2.1 Status and error displays for PROFINET IO LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) on the IM 157-1 MF interface module.
  • Page 382 PROFINET IO 5.2 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms Meaning of the RN/NS, ER/MS, MT/IO LED displays The following tables set out the meaning of the status and error displays for PROFINET IO. Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms. The LEDs display the status with the highest priority if there are different LED states due to overlaid events.
  • Page 383 PROFINET IO 5.2 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms P1 LINK and P2 LINK LEDs Table 2-42  Status displays of the P1 LINK and P2 LINK LEDs LEDs Meaning Solution P1 LINK P2 LINK There is no connection between the Check whether the bus cable to the switch MultiFieldbus interface of your module and or to the IO controller is disconnected.
  • Page 384 Independent of the cyclic user program, messages are made available on the display of the CPU S7-1500, the CPU web server and the HMI device. You will find more information on systemic diagnostics in the Function Manual Diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926). 5.2.2.2 Trigger a diagnostics interrupt...
  • Page 385 PROFINET IO 5.2 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2.2.3 Triggering a hardware interrupt During a hardware interrupt, the CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the hardware interrupt OB (e.g., OB 40). The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the hardware interrupt OB.
  • Page 386 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24000238). Causes of error and troubleshooting Causes of errors and corrective measures of diagnostics alarms are described in the device manuals of the I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89013554) in the section Interrupt, Error and System Messages. IM 157-1 MF (6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 01/2024, A5E52816358-AA...
  • Page 387 PROFINET IO 5.2 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms 5.2.3.2 Maintenance events Triggering of a maintenance event The PROFINET IO interfaces of the interface module support the diagnostics concept and maintenance concept in PROFINET IO according to standard IEC 61158‑6‑10. The goal is the early recognition and correction of potential disruptions.
  • Page 388 PROFINET IO 5.2 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records The structure of the diagnostics data records is differentiated by the BlockVersion. The following BlockVersion applies to the IM 157‑1 MF interface modules: Table 2-46  Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records IM 157‑1 MF interface module BlockVersion 6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0...
  • Page 389 EtherNet/IP Supported EtherNet/IP functions Supported functions The table below shows the functions that the module supports with EtherNet/IP. Supported functions Remarks I/O communication with scanner As of FW 1.0.x Parameter assignment As of FW 1.0.x Reading diagnostics As of FW 1.0.x Normative CIP objects As of FW 1.0.x Reset to factory settings...
  • Page 390 EtherNet/IP 6.2 Applicable modules with EtherNet/IP Supported CIP objects for EtherNet/IP The table below shows the CIP objects that the I/O device supports with EtherNet/IP. Supported CIP objects Remarks Identity object As of FW 1.0.x Assembly object As of FW 1.0.x Connection Manager object As of FW 1.0.x TCP/IP Interface object...
  • Page 391 EtherNet/IP 6.4 I/O data mapping Update time of the I/O data You can estimate the typical update time for an I/O cycle as follows:     RPI time (can be set starting at 2 ms)     + Processing time I/O data (typically 1.4 ms, +/- 1 ms jitter due to free-running cycles)     + Conversion time in module (dependent on cycle time and parameter assignment of the module) If necessary, you must take into account other influences caused by the EIP scanner and...
  • Page 392 EtherNet/IP 6.4 I/O data mapping Configuration example The following figure shows the configuration for this example: Figure 2-33  Configuration example The example uses the following modules: Slot Module IM 157-1 MF DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 Input buffer for EtherNet/IP The following table shows the input buffer for the example configuration for the I/O data alignment Byte: Slot Byte address...
  • Page 393 EtherNet/IP 6.5 MF Shared Device Slot Byte address Dataltem Lo/Hi Module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 The sum of the input data is 10 bytes. Output buffer for EtherNet/IP The following table shows the output buffer for the example configuration for the I/O data alignment Byte: Slot Byte address...
  • Page 394 EtherNet/IP 6.5 MF Shared Device Number of fieldbus connec­ Maximum I/O data per connection Max. download size with MFCT tions PROFINET EtherNet Modbus Inputs Outputs Inputs Outputs 1 ... 2 1 ... 10 EtherNet/IP or Mod­ bus TCP: 246 1 ... 2 PROFINET: 360 1 ... 10 1 ... 2 1 ... 10 1 ... 10 1 ... 2 1400...
  • Page 395 EtherNet/IP 6.6 Diagnostics Diagnostics 6.6.1 Status and error displays for EtherNet/IP LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) on the IM 157-1 MF interface module. ① RN/NS Green/red ② ER/MS Green/red ③ MT/IO Green/red/yellow ④ P1 LINK Green ⑤...
  • Page 396 EtherNet/IP 6.6 Diagnostics Meaning of the RN/NS, ER/MS, MT/IO LED displays The following tables set out the meaning of the status and error displays for EtherNet/IP. The LEDs display the status with the highest priority if there are different LED states due to overlaid events.
  • Page 397 EtherNet/IP 6.6 Diagnostics LEDs Meaning Notes RN/NS ER/MS MT/IO The MF device is not exchanging data. The • Establish the cyclic communication MF device has an error. via the I/O register area of the MF Flashes Flashes device or via EtherNet/IP. •...
  • Page 398 EtherNet/IP 6.6 Diagnostics ET-CON1 and ET-CON2 LEDs Table 2-49  Status displays of the ET-CON1 and ET-CON2 LEDs LEDs Meaning Solution ET-CON1 ET-CON2 There are no I/O modules at the respective Check the wiring for the ET-Connection or ET-Connection or the modules do not have the supply voltage for the I/O module.
  • Page 399 Modbus TCP Supported Modbus TCP functions Supported functions The table below shows the functions that the module supports with Modbus TCP. Supported functions RegLayoutVersion Remarks I/O communication with Modbus client V1.0 As of FW 1.0.x Free user registers (e.g. for coordination of the redundancy) V1.0 As of FW 1.0.x Device information...
  • Page 400 Modbus TCP 7.3 Update time of the I/O data Modules that can be used with Modbus TCP With Modbus TCP, the following modules cannot be used or can be used only with limitations. These modules are divided into 4 categories: Category Description This category is not relevant for Modbus TCP.
  • Page 401 Modbus TCP 7.4 I/O data mapping I/O data mapping In this chapter, you will find an example configuration of the I/O data mapping for Modbus TCP with the I/O data alignment byte. To derive the I/O data mapping with the MFCT tool, proceed as follows: 1.
  • Page 402 Modbus TCP 7.4 I/O data mapping Input buffer for Modbus TCP The following table shows the input buffer for the example configuration for the I/O data alignment Byte: Slot Byte Register Dataltem Lo/Hi byte Bit address Module address address 0x0000 IM 157-1 MF V1.0 0x0008 ET-Con1...
  • Page 403 Modbus TCP 7.5 MF Shared Device MF Shared Device Four ARs are available; these are shared by the fieldbuses. For EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP, only one AR is reserved in each case, regardless of the number of controller connections used. The maximum amount of I/O data must comply with the rules of the following table: Number of fieldbus connec­...
  • Page 404 Modbus TCP 7.6 Diagnostics Diagnostics 7.6.1 Status and error displays for Modbus TCP LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) on the IM 157-1 MF interface module. ① RN/NS Green/red ② ER/MS Green/red ③ MT/IO Green/red/yellow ④...
  • Page 405 Modbus TCP 7.6 Diagnostics Meaning of the RN/NS, ER/MS, MT/IO LED displays The following tables set out the meaning of the status and error displays for Modbus TCP: The LEDs display the status with the highest priority if there are different LED states due to overlaid events.
  • Page 406 Modbus TCP 7.6 Diagnostics LEDs Meaning Notes RN/NS ER/MS MT/IO • Check the device status in the Device-Info area and, if necessary, eliminate the diagnostics error. The MF device is not exchanging data. The • Establish the cyclic communication MF device has an error. via the I/O register area of the MF Flashes Flashes...
  • Page 407 Modbus TCP 7.6 Diagnostics P1 LINK and P2 LINK LEDs Table 2-51  Status displays of the P1 LINK and P2 LINK LEDs LEDs Meaning Solution P1 LINK P2 LINK There is no connection between the Check whether the bus cable to the switch MultiFieldbus interface of your module and or to the server is disconnected.
  • Page 408 Parameters Parameters The following table shows the parameters for the IM 157-1 MF interface module. Table 2-53  Parameters (GSD file) Parameters Value range Default Efficiency range Configuration control • Deactivated Deactivated ET 200AL • Activated MultiFieldbus parameter • Byte Byte ET 200AL I/O data alignment •...
  • Page 409 • A short instruction for CSV export of the I/O data alignment • An example of the I/O data alignment byte of a configuration example Further information is available in the SIMATIC MultiFieldbus (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109773209) Function Manual. Multi-Fieldbus Modbus TCP Hold time of the connection #0 ... #9 Use this parameter to set the hold time of each parameterized Modbus TCP.
  • Page 410 For more information on the firmware update using STEP 7, refer to the "Maintenance" section in the System Manual ET 200AL distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965). For more information on the firmware update using MFCT, refer to the "Firmware update with MFCT" section in the Function Manual SIMATIC MultiFieldbus (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109773209).
  • Page 411 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the interface module IM 157-1 MF The following table lists the technical specifications as of the issue date. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0 General information  ...
  • Page 412 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0 Input current   Current consumption (rated value) 80 mA from load voltage 1L+ (unswitched voltage) 4 A; Maximum value from load voltage 2L+, max. 4 A; Maximum value Power loss   Power loss, typ. 2.5 W Address area   Address space per module  ...
  • Page 413 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0 Redundancy mode   • PROFINET system redundancy (S2) on S7-1500R/H – – on S7-400H • PROFINET system redundancy (R1) • H-Sync forwarding Media redundancy   – MRPD – EtherNet/IP   Services   – CIP Implicit Messaging CIP Explicit Messaging –...
  • Page 414 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0 Modbus TCP   Services   – read coils (code=1) read discrete inputs (code=2) – – Read Holding Registers (Code=3) – Read Input Register (Code=4) – write single coil (code=5) – Write Single Register (Code=6) write multiple coils (code=15) –...
  • Page 415 Cat. 3 • • SIL acc. to IEC 62061 SIL 2 • remark on safety-oriented shutdown https://sup­ port.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/39198­ product functions / security / header   PROFINET Security Class signed firmware update Secure Boot safely removing data data integrity Ambient conditions  ...
  • Page 416 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the IM 157-1 MF interface module in the front and side views. Figure 2-37  Dimension drawing IM 157-1 MF (6ES7157-1MA00-0AB0) Equipment Manual, 01/2024, A5E52816358-AA...
  • Page 417 Cycle times The figure below shows the cycle times at ET-Connection based on the number of I/O modules with a send clock of 0.5 ms. Figure 2-38  Cycle times The cycle time at ET‑Connection is synchronized with the send clock of the active fieldbus. This means that the input data of the I/O modules is transmitted via ET‑Connection without further delay (wait time in the interface module).
  • Page 418 Gerätehandbuch SIMATIC ET 200AL Digitaleingabemodul DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 (6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0) Ausgabe 02/2016 support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 419 ET 200AL Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 Parameters/address space (6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0) Interrupts/diagnostic alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications PROFIenergy Dimension drawing 08/2021 A5E36680963-AB...
  • Page 421 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 422 Table of contents ET 200AL Documentation Guide..................424,476,503,529 Product overview........................428,480,507 Properties..................... 428,480,507,533 Operator controls and display elements................430 Wiring..............................431 Terminal and block diagram....................431 Pin assignment......................... 432 Parameters/address space........................434 Parameters........................434 Explanation of the parameters..................434 Address space........................434 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms.......................
  • Page 423 ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). Manual Collection ET 200AL The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 424 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 425 You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 426 ET 200AL Documentation Guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves.
  • Page 427 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0 View of the module Figure 2-39  View of the DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 digital input module DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 (6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E36680963-AB...
  • Page 428 • Stripping Tool for ET-Connection • M8 sealing cap • M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/89254965) system manual. DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 (6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E36680963-AB...
  • Page 429 Product overview 2.2 Operator controls and display elements Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 digital input module. ① DIAG: LED display for the diagnostic status ② X10 to X13: Sockets for the input signal ③...
  • Page 430 Wiring Terminal and block diagram The figure below shows an example of the pin assignment of signal inputs with 2-wire and 3-wire connection. ① 3-wire connection Infeed of the ET-Connection ② 2-wire connection Loop-through of the ET-Connection ③ 2-wire connection Supply voltage 1L+ (non-switched) ④...
  • Page 431 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment NOTE Color coding The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables. Pin assignment of the sockets for digital inputs The table below shows the pin assignment of the 4 sockets for the connection of digital inputs.
  • Page 432 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the sockets wire color of the X30 socket X31 socket bus line cable for (ET-Connection (ET-Connection ET-Connection OUT) Blue Orange Shield­ Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage.
  • Page 433 Parameters/address space Parameters The table below shows the parameters for the DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 digital input module. Table 2-58  Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground • Disable Disable Module • Enable Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground occurs.
  • Page 434 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Evaluating the value status An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital input module. Bits 0 to 7 in this byte are assigned to a channel and return information about the validity of the digital input value.
  • Page 435 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 digital input module. ① Diagnostic status (DIAG) (red/green) ② Channel status (0 to 7) (green) Figure 2-43  LED displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables set out the meaning of the status and error displays.
  • Page 436 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.2 Interrupts DIAG LED Table 2-59  Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning No supply voltage 1L+ • Module parameters not assigned (after switching on the supply voltage 1L+) Flashes • Loading firmware (while the firmware update is being performed, all LEDs retain their current status) •...
  • Page 437 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event, a diagnostics alarm is issued and the DIAG LED flashes red on the digital input module. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 2-61  Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics Error code...
  • Page 438 Technical specifications of the DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 digital input module The following table shows the technical specifications as of the issue date. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0 General information  ...
  • Page 439 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0 Power loss   Power loss, typ. 1.9 W Digital inputs   Number of digital inputs Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 Number of simultaneously controllable   inputs all mounting positions  ...
  • Page 440 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0 Potential separation channels   • between the channels between the channels and backplane bus • • between the channels and the power sup­ ply of the electronics Isolation   Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates  ...
  • Page 441 Additional information You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy" section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254863) and the "Saving energy with PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856). Application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454) are also available on the Internet.
  • Page 442 PROFIenergy 7.2 Behavior of the digital input module Behavior of the digital input module Display The channel status LEDs are directly influenced by the signal level at the socket. If the encoder supply is switched off, this causes the channel status LEDs to also switch off. Response to error detection All channels that are in pause mode on "PE_MODE_PROCEED"...
  • Page 443 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 digital input module in front and side view. Figure 2-44  Dimension drawing DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 (6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E36680963-AB...
  • Page 444 Gerätehandbuch SIMATIC ET 200AL Digitaleingabemodul DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 (6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0) Ausgabe 02/2016 support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 445 ET 200AL Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 Parameters/address space (6ES7141-5BF00-0BA0) Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications PROFIenergy Dimension drawing 08/2021 A5E32349579-AD...
  • Page 447 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 448 Table of contents ET 200AL Documentation Guide....................18,264 Product overview..........................268 Properties......................... 268 Operator controls and display elements................456 Wiring..............................457 Terminal and block diagram....................457 Pin assignment......................... 458 Parameters/address space........................460 Parameters........................460 Explanation of the parameters..................460 Address space........................460 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms......................
  • Page 449 ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). Manual Collection ET 200AL The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 450 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 451 You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 452 ET 200AL Documentation Guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves.
  • Page 453 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7141-5BF00-0BA0 View of the module Figure 2-45  View of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 digital input module DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 (6ES7141-5BF00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E32349579-AD...
  • Page 454 • Stripping Tool for ET-Connection • M8 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual. DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 (6ES7141-5BF00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E32349579-AD...
  • Page 455 Product overview 2.2 Operator controls and display elements Operator controls and display elements The following figure shows the operator controls and display elements of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 digital input module. ① DIAG: LED display for the diagnostic status ② X10 to X17: Sockets for the input signal ③...
  • Page 456 Wiring Terminal and block diagram The following figure shows an example of the pin assignment of signal outputs with 2- and 3-wire connection. ① 2-wire connection Infeed of the ET-Connection ② 3-wire connection Loop-through of the ET-Connection ③ DI circuit Supply voltage 1L+ (non-switched) ④...
  • Page 457 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment NOTE Color coding The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables. Pin assignment of the sockets for digital inputs The table below shows the pin assignment of the 8 sockets for the connection of digital inputs.
  • Page 458 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the sockets wire color of the X30 socket X31 socket bus line cable for (ET-Connection (ET-Connection ET-Connection OUT) Blue Orange Shield­ Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage.
  • Page 459 Parameters/address space Parameters The following table shows the parameters for the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 digital input module. Table 2-67  Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground • Disable Disable Module • Enable Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground occurs.
  • Page 460 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Evaluating the value status An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital input module. Bits 0 to 7 in this byte are assigned to a channel and provide information on the validity of the digital input value.
  • Page 461 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 digital input module. ① Diagnostic status (DIAG) (red/green) ② Channel status (0 to 7) (green) Figure 2-49  LED displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables set out the meaning of the status and error displays.
  • Page 462 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts DIAG LED Table 2-68  Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning No supply voltage 1L+ • Module parameters not assigned (after switching on the supply voltage 1L+) Flashes • Loading firmware (while the firmware update is being performed, all LEDs retain their current status) •...
  • Page 463 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event, a diagnostics alarm is issued and the DIAG LED flashes red on the digital input module. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 2-70  Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics Error code...
  • Page 464 Technical specifications of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 digital input module The following table shows the technical specifications as of the issue date. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7141-5BF00-0BA0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7141-5BF00-0BA0 General information  ...
  • Page 465 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7141-5BF00-0BA0 Digital inputs   Number of digital inputs Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 Number of simultaneously controllable   inputs all mounting positions   – up to 55 °C, max. Input voltage  ...
  • Page 466 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7141-5BF00-0BA0 Potential separation channels   • between the channels between the channels and backplane bus • • between the channels and the power sup­ ply of the electronics Isolation   Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates  ...
  • Page 467 Additional information You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy" section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254863) and the "Saving energy with PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). Application examples (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/41986454) are also available on the Internet.
  • Page 468 PROFIenergy 7.2 Behavior of the digital input module Behavior of the digital input module Requirement You can use the PROFIenergy function when you use the internal encoder supply. Display The channel status LEDs are directly influenced by the signal level at the socket. If the encoder supply is switched off, this causes the channel status LEDs to also switch off.
  • Page 469 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 digital input module in front and side view. Figure 2-50  Dimension drawing DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 (6ES7141-5BF00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E32349579-AD...
  • Page 470 DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module (6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0)
  • Page 471 ET 200AL Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 Parameters/address space (6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0) Interrupts/diagnostic alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications PROFIenergy Dimension drawing 08/2021 A5E36681813-AB...
  • Page 473 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 474 Table of contents ET 200AL Documentation Guide......................424 Product overview..........................428 Properties......................... 428 Operator controls and display elements................482 Wiring..............................483 Terminal and block diagram....................483 Pin assignment......................... 484 Parameters/address space........................487 Parameters........................487 Explanation of the parameters..................487 Address space........................487 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms.......................
  • Page 475 ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). Manual Collection ET 200AL The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 476 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 477 You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 478 ET 200AL Documentation Guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves.
  • Page 479 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0 View of the module Figure 2-51  View of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 (6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E36681813-AB...
  • Page 480 • Stripping Tool for ET-Connection • M8 sealing cap • M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/89254965) system manual. DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 (6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E36681813-AB...
  • Page 481 Product overview 2.2 Operator controls and display elements Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module. ① DIAG: LED display for the diagnostic status ② X10 to X17: Sockets for the input signal ③...
  • Page 482 Wiring Terminal and block diagram The figure below shows an example of the pin assignment of signal inputs with 2-wire and 3-wire connection. ① 3-wire connection Infeed of the ET-Connection ② 2-wire connection Loop-through of the ET-Connection ③ 2-wire connection Supply voltage 1L+ (non-switched) ④...
  • Page 483 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment NOTE Color coding The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables. Pin assignment of the sockets for digital inputs The table below shows the pin assignment of the 8 sockets for the connection of digital inputs.
  • Page 484 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment of the sockets for ET-Connection The table below shows the pin assignments of the 2 sockets for the connection of ET‑Connection. Table 2-73  Pin assignment for ET-Connection Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the sockets wire color of the X30 socket X31 socket...
  • Page 485 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment of the socket for loop-through of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the socket for loop-through of the supply voltage. Table 2-75  Pin assignment of the supply voltage socket Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the wire color of the...
  • Page 486 Parameters/address space Parameters The table below shows the parameters for the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module. Table 2-76  Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground • Disable Disable Module • Enable Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground occurs.
  • Page 487 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Evaluating the value status An additional two bytes are occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital input module. Bits 0 to 7 in these bytes are assigned to a channel and return information about the validity of the digital input value.
  • Page 488 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module. ① Diagnostic status (DIAG) (red/green) ② Channel status (0 to 15) (green) Figure 2-55  LED displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables set out the meaning of the status and error displays.
  • Page 489 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.2 Interrupts DIAG LED Table 2-77  Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning No supply voltage 1L+ • Module parameters not assigned (after switching on the supply voltage 1L+) Flashes • Loading firmware (while the firmware update is being performed, all LEDs retain their current status) •...
  • Page 490 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event, a diagnostics alarm is issued and the DIAG LED flashes red on the digital input module. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 2-79  Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics Error code...
  • Page 491 Technical specifications of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module The following table shows the technical specifications as of the issue date. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0 General information  ...
  • Page 492 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0 Power loss   Power loss, typ. 2.7 W Digital inputs   Number of digital inputs Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 Number of simultaneously controllable   inputs all mounting positions  ...
  • Page 493 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0 Potential separation channels   • between the channels between the channels and backplane bus • • between the channels and the power sup­ ply of the electronics Isolation   Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates  ...
  • Page 494 Additional information You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy" section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254863) and the "Saving energy with PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856). Application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454) are also available on the Internet.
  • Page 495 PROFIenergy 7.2 Behavior of the digital input module Behavior of the digital input module Display The channel status LEDs are directly influenced by the signal level at the socket. If the encoder supply is switched off, this causes the channel status LEDs to also switch off. Response to error detection All channels that are in pause mode on "PE_MODE_PROCEED"...
  • Page 496 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module in front and side view. Figure 2-56  Dimension drawing DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 (6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E36681813-AB...
  • Page 497 Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 (6ES7142-5AF00-0BA0)
  • Page 498 ET 200AL Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL Digital output module DQ Parameters/address space 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 (6ES7142-5AF00-0BA0) Interrupts/diagnostic alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications PROFIenergy Dimension drawing 08/2021 A5E36683723-AB...
  • Page 500 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 501 Table of contents ET 200AL Documentation Guide....................424,476 Product overview......................... 428,480 Properties........................428,480 Operator controls and display elements................509 Wiring..............................510 Terminal and block diagram....................510 Pin assignment......................... 511 Parameters/address space........................513 Parameters........................513 Explanation of the parameters..................513 Address space........................514 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms.......................
  • Page 502 ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). Manual Collection ET 200AL The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 503 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 504 You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 505 ET 200AL Documentation Guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves.
  • Page 506 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7142-5AF00-0BA0 View of the module Figure 2-57  View of the DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 digital output module Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 (6ES7142-5AF00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E36683723-AB...
  • Page 507 • M8 sealing cap • M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/89254965) system manual. Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 (6ES7142-5AF00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E36683723-AB...
  • Page 508 Product overview 2.2 Operator controls and display elements Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 digital output module. ① DIAG: LED display for the diagnostic status ② X10 to X17: Sockets for the output signal ③...
  • Page 509 Wiring Terminal and block diagram The example in the figure below shows the pin assignment of signal outputs. 4 × DQ 4 × DQ DIAG ① Output to 1L+ X10 to X17 Channels 0 to 7 ② Output to 2L+ Infeed of the ET-Connection ③...
  • Page 510 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment NOTE Color coding The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables. Pin assignment of the sockets for digital outputs The tables below show the pin assignments of the 8 sockets for connection of the digital outputs.
  • Page 511 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage. Table 2-83  Pin assignment of the supply voltage connector Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the wire color of the...
  • Page 512 Parameters/address space Parameters The table below shows the parameters for the DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 digital output module. Table 2-85  Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope Diagnostics: Missing load voltage 2L+ • Disable Disable Module • Enable Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground • Disable Disable Module (Short-circuit of the •...
  • Page 513 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Address space The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 with value status (Quality Information, QI). The address space for the value status is allocated by the module, if the value status is configured using the PROFINET interface module.
  • Page 514 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12. ① Diagnostic status (DIAG) (red/green) ② Channel status (0 to 7) (green) ③ Load voltage 2L+ (PWR) (green) Figure 2-61  LED displays Meaning of the LEDs...
  • Page 515 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.2 Interrupts DIAG LED Table 2-86  Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning No supply voltage 1L+ • Module parameters not assigned (after switching on the supply voltage 1L+) Flashes • Loading firmware (while the firmware update is being performed, all LEDs retain their cur­ rent status) •...
  • Page 516 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event, a diagnostics alarm is issued and the DIAG LED flashes red on the digital output module. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, from the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 2-89  Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning...
  • Page 517 Technical specifications of the DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 digital output module The following table shows the technical specifications as of the issue date. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7142-5AF00-0BA0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7142-5AF00-0BA0 General information  ...
  • Page 518 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7142-5AF00-0BA0 Power loss   Power loss, typ. 4 W Digital outputs   Number of digital outputs • in groups of 4; 2 load groups for 4 outputs each Short-circuit protection Yes; per channel, electronic Response threshold, typ.
  • Page 519 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7142-5AF00-0BA0 Potential separation channels   • between the channels, in groups of between the channels and backplane bus • • between the channels and the power sup­ No; 4 channels are non-isolated and 4 channels ply of the electronics are isolated from supply voltage 1L+ Isolation...
  • Page 520 Additional information You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy" section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254863) and the "Saving energy with PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856). Application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454) are also available on the Internet.
  • Page 521 PROFIenergy 7.2 Behavior of the digital output module Behavior of the digital output module Display The channel status LEDs are directly affected by the signal level at the socket. Response to error detection All channels that are in pause mode on "PE_MODE_PROCEED" report their diagnostic status as in productive mode.
  • Page 522 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 digital output module in front and side views. Figure 2-62  Dimension drawing Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 (6ES7142-5AF00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E36683723-AB...
  • Page 523 Digital input/output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 (6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0)
  • Page 524 ET 200AL Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL Digital input/digital output Parameters/address space module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 (6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0) Interrupts/diagnostic alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications PROFIenergy Dimension drawing 08/2021 A5E36683613-AB...
  • Page 526 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 527 Table of contents ET 200AL Documentation Guide....................424,476 Product overview......................... 428,480 Properties........................428,480 Operator controls and display elements................535 Wiring..............................536 Terminal and block diagram....................536 Pin assignment......................... 537 Parameters/address space........................540 Parameters........................540 Explanation of the parameters..................540 Address space........................541 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms.......................
  • Page 528 ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). Manual Collection ET 200AL The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 529 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 530 You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 531 ET 200AL Documentation Guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves.
  • Page 532 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0 View of the module Figure 2-63  View of the DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 digital input/digital output module Digital input/digital output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 (6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E36683613-AB...
  • Page 533 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: • 4 digital inputs or digital outputs and 4 digital outputs, depending on parameter assignment – DIQ signals connected to 1L+ (non-switched) – DQ signals connected to 2L+ (switched) •...
  • Page 534 See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/89254965) system manual. Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 digital input/digital output module.
  • Page 535 Wiring Terminal and block diagram The figure below shows an example of the pin assignment of signal inputs with 2-wire and 3-wire connection as well as signal outputs. ① Configured as input: 3-wire connection Infeed of the ET-Connection ② Configured as output Loop-through of the ET-Connection ③...
  • Page 536 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment X10 to X13 Channels 0 to 7 LEDs channel status (4, 5, 6 and 7) (green) Infeed of supply voltages DIAG LED diagnostic status (red/green) Loop-through of supply voltages LED supply voltage 2L+ (green) Figure 2-65  Terminal and block diagram Pin assignment NOTE Color coding...
  • Page 537 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Assignment Front view of the sockets X12 and X13 sockets for digital outputs X12, X13 Ground 2M Output signal DQ : Connector X12 Output signal DQ : Connector X13 Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the sockets for ET-Connection The table below shows the pin assignments of the 2 sockets for the connection of ET‑Connection.
  • Page 538 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment of the socket for loop-through of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the socket for loop-through of the supply voltage. Table 2-95  Pin assignment of the supply voltage socket Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the wire color of the...
  • Page 539 Parameters/address space Parameters The table below shows the parameters for the DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 digital input/digital output module. Table 2-96  Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope Diagnostics: Missing load voltage 2L+ • Disable Disable Module • Enable Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground • Disable Disable Module (Short-circuit of...
  • Page 540 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Reaction to CPU/master STOP With this parameter, you set the reaction of the digital outputs of the digital input/ digital output module after a CPU/master STOP: • Shut down: The digital output is de-energized. • Keep last value: The last value of the digital output remains activated. •...
  • Page 541 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Evaluating the value status An additional two bytes are occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital input/digital output module. The value status of the inputs is assigned to bits 0 to 3 in input byte x + 1.
  • Page 542 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the digital input/ digital output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12. ① Diagnostic status (DIAG) (red/green) ② Channel status (0 to 7) (green) ③ Load voltage 2L+ (PWR) (green) Figure 2-67  LED displays...
  • Page 543 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.1 Status and error displays DIAG LED Table 2-97  Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning No supply voltage 1L+ • Module parameters not assigned (after switching on the supply voltage 1L+) Flashes • Loading firmware (while the firmware update is being performed, all LEDs retain their cur­ rent status) •...
  • Page 544 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Interrupts The DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 digital input/digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupt The digital input/digital output module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events: • Short-circuit of encoder supply to ground • Short-circuit of outputs to ground •...
  • Page 545 Technical specifications of the DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 digital input/digital output module The following table shows the technical specifications as of the issue date. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0 General information  ...
  • Page 546 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0 Input current   Current consumption (rated value) 40 mA; without load from load voltage 1L+ (unswitched voltage) 4 A; Maximum value from load voltage 2L+, max. 4 A; Maximum value Encoder supply   Number of outputs 24 V encoder supply  ...
  • Page 547 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0 Switching capacity of the outputs   • on lamp load, max. 5 W Load resistance range   lower limit 48 Ω • • upper limit 4 kΩ Output voltage   for signal "1", min. L+ (-0.8 V) •...
  • Page 548 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0 Isolation   Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Degree and class of protection   IP degree of protection IP65/67 Standards, approvals, certificates   Suitable for safety-related tripping of standard Yes; From FS01 modules Highest safety class achievable for safety-  ...
  • Page 549 Additional information You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy" section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254863) and the "Saving energy with PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856). Application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454) are also available on the Internet.
  • Page 550 PROFIenergy 7.2 DI operating mode DI operating mode Display The channel status LEDs are directly influenced by the signal level at the socket. If the encoder supply is switched off, this causes the channel status LEDs to also switch off. Response to error detection All channels that are in pause mode on "PE_MODE_PROCEED"...
  • Page 551 PROFIenergy 7.3 DQ operating mode DQ operating mode Display The channel status LEDs are directly affected by the signal level at the socket. Response to error detection All channels that are in pause mode on "PE_MODE_PROCEED" report their diagnostic status as in productive mode.
  • Page 552 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 digital input/digital output module in front and side views. Figure 2-68  Dimension drawing Digital input/digital output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 (6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E36683613-AB...
  • Page 553 Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 4xM12 (6ES7144-5KD50-0BA0)
  • Page 554 ET 200AL Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL Analog input module AI 4xU/I/RTD Parameters/address space 4xM12 (6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0) Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications PROFIenergy Dimension drawing Representation of analog values 08/2021 A5E32350124-AG...
  • Page 556 For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are Analog input module AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 (6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E32350124-AG...
  • Page 557 Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog input module AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 (6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0)
  • Page 558 Table of contents ET 200AL Documentation Guide......................677 Product overview..........................681 Properties......................... 681 Operator controls and display elements................683 Wiring..............................271 Terminal and block diagram....................271 Pin assignment......................... 687 Parameters/address space........................691 Measurement types and measuring ranges............... 691 Parameters........................691 Explanation of the parameters..................
  • Page 559 ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). Manual Collection ET 200AL The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 560 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 561 You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 562 ET 200AL Documentation Guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves.
  • Page 563 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0 View of the module Figure 2-103  View of the analog input module AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 Analog input module AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 (6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E32350124-AG...
  • Page 564 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: • 4 analog inputs • M12 sockets for connection of sensors • Measurement type can be set for each channel: – Voltage – Current (2-/4-wire transducers) – Resistance (2-/3-wire connection) –...
  • Page 565 You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual. Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the analog input module AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12.
  • Page 566 Analog input module AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 (6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E32350124-AG...
  • Page 567 Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram Wiring Terminal and block diagram The figure below shows an example of the pin assignment for voltage measurement and current measurement. ① Voltage measurement Infeed of the ET-Connection ② Current measurement (2 DMU) Loop-through of the ET-Connection ③...
  • Page 568 Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram X10 to X13 Channels 0 to 3 LEDs channel status (0, 1, 2 and 3) (green) Infeed of supply voltages DIAG LED diagnostic status (red/green) Loop-through of supply voltages Figure 2-105  Terminal and block diagram for voltage and current measurement The example in the following figure shows the pin assignment for the resistance thermometer.
  • Page 569 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment NOTE Color coding The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables. Pin assignment of the sockets for analog inputs The tables below show the pin assignments of the four sockets for connection of the analog inputs.
  • Page 570 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Table 2-164  Pin assignment of the sockets for analog inputs (current measurement) Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X13 sockets for analog inputs (current measurement) 24 V encoder supply 1U (derived from 1L+ non-switched) Measuring input M +: Connector X10 Measuring input M +: Connector X11...
  • Page 571 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X13 sockets for analog inputs (RTD/R 3-wire connection) Measurement cable Ic -, M -: Connector X10 Measurement cable Ic -, M -: Connector X11 Measurement cable Ic -, M -: Connector X12 Measurement cable Ic -, M...
  • Page 572 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage. Table 2-168  Pin assignment of the supply voltage connector Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the core color of the...
  • Page 573 Parameters/address space Measurement types and measuring ranges The table below indicates which measuring range is configurable. Table 2-170  Measurement type and measuring ranges Measurement type Measuring range Temperature coeffi­ Resolution cient Deactivated – – – Voltage 1 V to 5 V – max. 16-bit 0 V to 10 V Current (4-wire transducer) 0 mA to 20 mA –...
  • Page 574 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters The table below shows the PROFINET and PROFIBUS parameters for the analog input module AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 for configuration with GSD file. Explanation of abbreviations in table below: 4-DMU 4-wire transducer 2-DMU 2-wire transducer R-3L Resistance 3-wire transducer R-2L Resistance 2-wire transducer RTD-3L...
  • Page 575 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameters Value range Default GSD file GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP • RTD-3L Ni100 672 std. • RTD-2L Ni100 618 cl. • RTD-2L Ni100 618 std. • RTD-2L Ni100 672 cl. • RTD-2L Ni100 672 std. Smoothing channel n •...
  • Page 576 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters NOTE Unused channels "Deactivate" unused inputs in the parameter assignment to shorten the cycle time of the module. A deactivated input always returns the value 7FFF The table below shows the permitted value ranges for the measurement type. Table 2-172  Measuring ranges of the hardware interrupts Measurement Measuring...
  • Page 577 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Measurement Measuring Low limit High limit Default Unit type range Low limit High limit Resistance Ni100 std. -1569 5629 -760 4820 Decimal thermometer 168.3 568.1 213.2 523.2 1683 5681 2132 5232 Decimal Explanation of the parameters Temperature unit You use this parameter to set the temperature unit with which you want to measure the temperature.
  • Page 578 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Smoothing channel n The purpose of smoothing is to filter out interferences. The greater the smoothing factor, the better the filter effect. This is technically implemented in the form of a digital filter. The smoothing can be set in 4 levels.
  • Page 579 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics: Wire break channel n Enabling of the diagnostics if the analog input module has no current flow or the current is too weak for measurement at the correspondingly configured input. NOTE Wire break diagnostics A wire break diagnostics is not possible for all measuring ranges and measurement types for analog input channels.
  • Page 580 Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space Diagnostics: Overflow channel n Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange. Diagnostics: Overflow/Underflow (for PROFIBUS only) Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange or falls below the underrange. The diagnostic enable has an effect on all channels.
  • Page 581 Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space Configuration options of analog input module AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 You have the following configuration options: • Configuration 1: without value status • Configuration 2: with value status Evaluating the value status If you enable the value status for the analog input module, a bit is also assigned in the input address space.
  • Page 582 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED display (status and error displays) of the analog input module AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12. ① Diagnostic status (DIAG) (red/green) ② Channel status (0, 1, 2 and 3) (green) Figure 2-109  LED displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables set out the meaning of the status and error displays.
  • Page 583 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts DIAG LED Table 2-175  Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning No supply voltage 1L+ • Module parameters not assigned (after switching on the supply voltage 1L+) Flashes • Loading firmware (while the firmware update is being performed, all LEDs retain their current status) •...
  • Page 584 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts Measurement Measuring Diagnostics type range Short-circuit Wire break Underflow Overflow Underflow/ to ground Overflow Current 4 mA to 20 mA2-DMU 0 mA to 20 mA4-DMU 4 mA to 20 mA4-DMU Resistance 150 Ω 300 Ω Resistance PT100 thermometer Ni100 Column valid for configuration with PROFINET GSD file Column valid for configuration with PROFIBUS GSD file Hardware interrupt...
  • Page 585 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts The figure below shows the assignment to the bits of the local data double word 8. Figure 2-110  Start information of the organization block Structure of the additional interrupt information Table 2-178  Structure of USI = W#16#0001 Data block name Contents Comment Bytes...
  • Page 586 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostic event and the DIAG LED flashes red on the analog input module. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. The following tables set out the diagnostics alarms for the set measuring range.
  • Page 587 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Table 2-181  Diagnostics alarms - for the measuring range: 150 Ω and 300 Ω Diagnostics Error code Meaning Remedy alarm Wire break Impedance of encoder circuit too Use a different encoder type or high modify the wiring, for example, using cables with larger cross-sec­...
  • Page 588 Technical specifications of the analog input module AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 The following table shows the technical specifications as of the issue date. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0 General information  ...
  • Page 589 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0 Analog inputs   Number of analog inputs • For current measurement For voltage measurement • • For resistance/resistance thermometer measurement permissible input voltage for voltage input 30 V (destruction limit), max. permissible input current for current input 50 mA (destruction limit), max.
  • Page 590 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0 Integration and conversion time/resolution per   channel • Resolution with overrange (bit including 16 bit sign), max. • Integration time, parameterizable Yes; channel by channel Integration time (ms) 0,3 / 16,7 / 20 / 60 • •...
  • Page 591 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0 Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)   • Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.25 % Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.25 % • • Resistance, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.15 % • Resistance thermometer, relative to input 0.15 % range, (+/-) Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1...
  • Page 592 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0 Ambient conditions   Ambient temperature during operation   • min. -30 °C max. 55 °C • Connection method   Design of electrical connection for the inputs M12, 5-pole and outputs Design of electrical connection for supply M8, 4-pole voltage ET-Connection  ...
  • Page 593 Additional information You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy" section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254863) and the "Saving energy with PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). Application examples (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/41986454) are also available on the Internet.
  • Page 594 PROFIenergy 7.2 Response of the analog input module Response of the analog input module Requirement You can use the PROFIenergy function when you use the internal encoder supply. Display The channel status LEDs are not affected by PROFIenergy. Response to error detection All channels that are in pause mode on "PE_MODE_PROCEED"...
  • Page 595 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 analog input module in front and side view. Figure 2-111  Dimension drawing Analog input module AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 (6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E32350124-AG...
  • Page 596 Representation of analog values Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges Table 2-184  Voltage measuring range 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V Values Voltage measuring range Range Dec. Hex. 1 V to 5 V 0 V to 10 V 32767 7FFF >5.704 V >11.759 V Overflow 32511 7EFF...
  • Page 597 Representation of analog values 9.4 Representation of analog values for resistance thermometer Representation of analog values for resistance-based sensors Resistance-based sensor Table 2-186  Resistance-based sensor of 150 Ω and 300 Ω Values Resistance-based sensor range Range Dec. Hex. 150 Ω 300 Ω 32767 7FFF >176.38 Ω...
  • Page 598 Representation of analog values 9.4 Representation of analog values for resistance thermometer Table 2-188  Resistance thermometer Pt 100 climatic Pt x00 climatic in °C Values Pt x00 climatic in Values Range (1 digit = 0.01 °C) °F Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex. (1 digit = 0.01 °F) >155.00 32767 7FFF...
  • Page 599 Gerätehandbuch SIMATIC ET 200AL Analogeingabemodul AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 (6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0) Ausgabe 07/2019 support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 600 ET 200AL Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC Parameters/address space 4xM12 (6ES7144-5KD50-0BA0) Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications Dimension drawing Representation of analog values 08/2021 A5E48753535-AB...
  • Page 602 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no...
  • Page 603 Preface longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats. To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 4xM12 (6ES7144-5KD50-0BA0)
  • Page 604 Table of contents ET 200AL Documentation Guide......................723 Product overview..........................727 Properties......................... 727 Operator controls and display elements................729 Wiring..............................730 Terminal and block diagram....................730 Pin assignment......................... 732 Parameters/address space........................736 Measurement types and measuring ranges............... 736 Parameters........................195 Explanation of the parameters..................
  • Page 605 ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). Manual Collection ET 200AL The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 606 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 607 You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 608 ET 200AL Documentation Guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves.
  • Page 609 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7144-5KD50-0BA0 View of the module Figure 2-112  View of the analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 4xM12 Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 4xM12 (6ES7144-5KD50-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E48753535-AB...
  • Page 610 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: • 4 analog inputs • M12 sockets for connection of sensors • Measurement type can be set for each channel: – Voltage measurement: ±80 mV – Resistance measurement: 0-150 Ohm, 0-300 Ohm (2-/3-/4-wire connection) –...
  • Page 611 You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965) system manual. Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator control and display elements of the analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 4xM12.
  • Page 612 Wiring Terminal and block diagram The figure below shows an example of the pin assignment for voltage measurement and thermocouple measurement. ① Voltage measurement Infeed of the ET-Connection ② Thermocouple measurement Loop-through of the ET-Connection ③ Multiplexer Supply voltage 1L+ (non-switched) ④...
  • Page 613 Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram The figure below shows an example of the pin assignment for thermal resistance and resistance measurement. ① RTD/R 2-wire connection Infeed of the ET-Connection ② RTD/R 3-wire connection Loop-through of the ET-Connection ③ RTD/R 4-wire connection Supply voltage 1L+ (non-switched) ④...
  • Page 614 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment NOTE Color coding The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables. Pin assignment of the sockets for analog inputs The tables below show the pin assignments of the four sockets for connection of the analog inputs.
  • Page 615 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Table 2-193  Pin assignment for analog inputs (RTD/R 3-wire connection) Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 ... X13 - sockets for analog inputs (RTD/R 3-wire connection) Constant current cable Ic +: Connector X10 Constant current cable Ic +: Connector X11 Constant current cable Ic +: Connector X12 Constant current cable Ic...
  • Page 616 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment of the sockets for ET-Connection The table below shows the pin assignments of the 2 sockets for the connection of ET‑Connection. Table 2-195  Pin assignment for ET-Connection Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the sockets core color of the X30 socket X31 socket...
  • Page 617 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment of the socket for loop-through of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the socket for loop-through of the supply voltage. Table 2-197  Pin assignment of the supply voltage socket Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the core color of the...
  • Page 618 Parameters/address space Measurement types and measuring ranges The table below indicates which measuring range is configurable. Table 2-198  Measurement type and measuring ranges Measurement type Measuring range Temperature coeffi­ Resolution cient Deactivated – – – Voltage +/- 80 mV – Max. 16-bit • Resistance •...
  • Page 619 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameters Parameters of the analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 4xM12 Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of the parameter assignment of the module with STEP 7. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: •...
  • Page 620 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Value range Default Effective range with con­ figuration software e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Type/range of meas­ • Pt 100 climatic range Voltage ±80 mV Channel Channel urement • Pt 1000 climatic range •...
  • Page 621 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameter Value range Default Effective range with con­ figuration software e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal) GSD file GSD file PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Channel Channel Reference junction • Enable Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Channel Channel Wire break •...
  • Page 622 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Value ranges of the hardware interrupts The table below shows the permitted value ranges of the hardware interrupts for the measurement type. Table 2-200  Value ranges of the hardware interrupts Measurement type Measuring range Low limit High limit Unit Voltage ± 80 mV...
  • Page 623 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Measurement type Measuring range Low limit High limit Unit Thermocouple Type N -4539 28219 Decimal 1823.1 18231 Decimal Type E -269.9 1199.9 °C -2699 11999 Decimal -453.9 2191.9 -4539 21919 Decimal 1473.1 14731 Decimal Types R, S -169.9 2018.9 °C...
  • Page 624 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Measurement type Measuring range Low limit High limit Unit Thermocouple Type U -199.9 849.9 °C -1999 8499 Decimal -327.9 1561.9 -3279 15619 Decimal 73.3 1123.1 11231 Decimal Type C -119.9 2499.9 °C -1199 24999 Decimal -183.9 3276.5 -1839 32765...
  • Page 625 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Explanation of the parameters Temperature unit You use this parameter to set the temperature unit with which you want to measure the temperature. Type/range of measurement You use this parameter to set the measurement type or the measuring range for acquiring the measured values.
  • Page 626 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Reference junction If the measuring point is subjected to a different temperature than the reference junction (free ends of the thermocouple at the connection point), a thermal voltage arises between the free ends. The level of the thermal voltage depends: •...
  • Page 627 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Compensation Explanation type No compensation Properties With this compensation type, the reference junction temperature of the thermocouples is measured outside the AI 4xRTD/TC 4xM12 electronic module. You can, for example, connect a compensating box to the thermocouple for this purpose. Principle of operation The temperature of the reference junction for this type of compensation is specified as 0 °C.
  • Page 628 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Interference frequency suppression This parameter suppresses interference for analog input modules which is caused by the frequency of the alternating voltage network in use. The frequency of the alternating voltage network may negatively affect the measured value, in particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples.
  • Page 629 Parameters/address space 4.4 Structure of a data record for dynamic reference temperature Diagnostics: Overflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange. Conductor resistance Parameters for the measurement types resistor and thermal resistor (2-wire connection). The parameter is used to compensate the conductor resistance without interfering with the sensor wiring.
  • Page 630 Parameters/address space 4.4 Structure of a data record for dynamic reference temperature Structure of data record 192 for dynamic reference temperature The following figure shows you an example of the structure of data record 192 for channel 0. The structure for data records 193 to 195 is identical. Figure 2-117  Structure of data record 192 Valid values for fixed temperature compensation The selectable values must lie within the permitted value range.
  • Page 631 Additional information You can find more information on compensation of the reference junction temperature via data record in the function manual SIMATIC analog value processing (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67989094). Address space The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 4xRTD/TC 4xM12 analog input module with value status (Quality Information, QI).
  • Page 632 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED display (status and error displays) of the AI 4xRTD/TC 4xM12 analog input module. ① Diagnostic status (DIAG) (red/green) ② Channel status (0, 1, 2 and 3) (green) Figure 2-119  LED displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables set out the meaning of the status and error displays.
  • Page 633 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts DIAG LED Table 2-205  Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning No supply voltage 1L+ • Module parameters not assigned • Loading firmware Flashes (while the firmware update is being performed, all LEDs retain their current status) •...
  • Page 634 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts Hardware interrupt The analog input module generates a hardware interrupt with the following events: • Low limit 1 violated • High limit 1 violated • Low limit 2 violated • High limit 2 violated Detailed information on the event is available in the hardware interrupt organization block with the instruction "RALRM"...
  • Page 635 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Data block name Contents Comment Bytes Event B#16#04 High limit 1 violated B#16#05 Low limit 2 violated B#16#06 High limit 2 violated Diagnostics alarms A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event. The DIAG LED flashes red on the analog output module.
  • Page 636 Technical specifications of the AI 4xRTD/TC 4xM12 analog input module The following table shows the technical specifications as of the issue date. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7144-5KD50-0BA0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7144-5KD50-0BA0 General information  ...
  • Page 637 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7144-5KD50-0BA0 Analog inputs   Number of analog inputs • For voltage measurement For resistance/resistance thermometer • measurement • For thermocouple measurement permissible input voltage for voltage input 15 V (destruction limit), max. Constant measurement current for resistance- 230 ...
  • Page 638 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7144-5KD50-0BA0 Input ranges (rated values), resistance   thermometer • Ni 100 Yes; Standard/climate – Input resistance (Ni 100) 10 MΩ Ni 1000 Yes; Standard/climate • – Input resistance (Ni 1000) 10 MΩ Pt 100 Yes; Standard/climate •...
  • Page 639 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7144-5KD50-0BA0 Smoothing of measured values   • parameterizable Step: None Yes; 1x cycle time • • Step: low Yes; 4x cycle time • Step: Medium Yes; 16x cycle time • Step: High Yes; 32x cycle time Encoder  ...
  • Page 640 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7144-5KD50-0BA0 Interrupts/diagnostics/status information   Alarms   • Diagnostic alarm Yes; Parameterizable Limit value alarm Yes; Parameterizable • Diagnoses   • Wire-break Yes; Not for ±80 mV Overflow/underflow • Diagnostics indication LED   • Channel status display Yes;...
  • Page 641 Technical specifications 6.1 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7144-5KD50-0BA0 ET-Connection   • ET-Connection M8, 4-pin, shielded Dimensions   Width 30 mm Height 159 mm Depth 40 mm Weights   Weight, approx. 168 g Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 4xM12 (6ES7144-5KD50-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E48753535-AB...
  • Page 642 Dimension drawing Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the AI 4xRTD/TC 4xM12 analog input module in the front and side view. Figure 2-121  Dimension drawing Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 4xM12 (6ES7144-5KD50-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E48753535-AB...
  • Page 643 Representation of analog values Representation of analog values in voltage measuring range The table below lists the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the voltage measuring range. Table 2-210  Voltage measuring range ± 80 mV Values Voltage measuring range Range Dec. Hex. ± 80 mV 32767 7FFF >...
  • Page 644 Representation of analog values 8.3 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors Values Resistance-based sensor range Range Dec. Hex. 150 Ω 300 Ω 20736 5100 112.5 Ω 225 Ω Nominal range 5.43 mΩ 10.85 mΩ 0 Ω 0 Ω NOTE Negative value for 2-wire connection A negative value is possible in these constellations: •...
  • Page 645 Representation of analog values 8.3 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors Pt x00 Climatic in °C Values Pt x00 Climatic in Values Range (1 digit = 0.01 °C) °F Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex. (1 digit = 0.01 °F) 130.00 13000 32C8 266.00 26600...
  • Page 646 Representation of analog values 8.4 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Representation of analog values for thermocouples The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the thermocouples. Table 2-216  Thermocouple type B Type B in Values Type B Values Type B Values...
  • Page 647 Representation of analog values 8.4 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Table 2-219  Thermocouple type J Type J Values Type J Values Type J Values Range in °C in °F in K Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex. > 1450.0 32767 7FFF > 2642.0 32767 7FFF >...
  • Page 648 Representation of analog values 8.4 Representation of analog values for thermocouples Table 2-223  Thermocouples R and S Types R, S Values Types R, S Values Types R, S Values Range in °C in °F in K Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex.
  • Page 649 Gerätehandbuch SIMATIC ET 200AL Analogausgabemodul AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 (6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0) Ausgabe 07/2019 support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 650 ET 200AL Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL Analog output module AQ 4xU/I Parameters/address space 4xM12 (6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0) Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications PROFIenergy Dimension drawing Representation of analog values 08/2021 A5E38687953-AC...
  • Page 652 Purpose of the documentation This manual supplements the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual. Functions that are generally applicable to the ET 200AL distributed I/O system are described there. The information provided in the present manual, the system manual and the function manuals enables you to commission the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
  • Page 653 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 654 Table of contents ET 200AL Documentation Guide......................773 Product overview..........................777 Properties......................... 777 Operator controls and display elements................779 Wiring..............................780 Terminal and block diagram....................780 Pin assignment......................... 781 Parameters/address space........................784 Output ranges........................784 Parameters........................785 Explanation of the parameters..................786 Address space........................
  • Page 655 ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). Manual Collection ET 200AL The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 656 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 657 You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 658 ET 200AL Documentation Guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves.
  • Page 659 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0 View of the module Figure 2-122  View of the analog output module AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 Analog output module AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 (6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E38687953-AC...
  • Page 660 • M8 sealing cap • M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/89254965) system manual. Analog output module AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 (6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E38687953-AC...
  • Page 661 Product overview 2.2 Operator controls and display elements Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 analog output module. ① DIAG: LED display for the diagnostic status ② X10 to X13: Sockets for the output signal ③...
  • Page 662 Wiring Terminal and block diagram The example in the following figure shows the pin assignment for voltage and current output of the analog output module AQ 4xU/I 4xM12. ① Voltage/current output as 2-wire connection Loop-through of the ET-Connection ② Voltage/current output as 4-wire connection Supply voltage 1L+ (non-switched) ③...
  • Page 663 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment NOTE Color coding The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables. Pin assignment of the sockets for analog outputs The tables below show the pin assignments of the 4 sockets for connection of the analog outputs.
  • Page 664 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment of the sockets for ET-Connection The table below shows the pin assignments of the 2 sockets for the connection of ET‑Connection. Table 2-228  Pin assignment for ET-Connection Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the sockets core color of the X30 socket X31 socket...
  • Page 665 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment of the socket for loop-through of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the socket for loop-through of the supply voltage. Table 2-230  Pin assignment of the supply voltage socket Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the core color of the...
  • Page 666 Parameters/address space Output ranges The table below indicates which output types and ranges are configurable. Output type and output ranges Table 2-231  Output type and output ranges Output type Output range Disabled Voltage +/- 10 V 0 V to 10 V 1 V to 5 V Current +/- 20 mA 0 mA to 20 mA...
  • Page 667 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameters Parameters of the AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 analog output module The table below lists the parameters that can be set. The effective range of the parameters that can be set depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible: •...
  • Page 668 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of the parameters Short-circuit detection The diagnostics for short circuit to ground can be configured for the voltage output type. Short-circuit detection cannot be guaranteed for small output values (between 0.1 V and +0.1 V). Wire break detection The diagnostics for wire break can be configured for the current output type.
  • Page 669 Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space Reaction to CPU/master STOP Adjusts the reaction of the module after a CPU/master STOP. • Shut down: The analog output is de-energized. • Keep last value: The last value of the analog output remains activated. •...
  • Page 670 Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space Configuration options of the AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 analog output module You have the following configuration options: • Configuration 1: without value status • Configuration 2: with value status Evaluating the value status An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the analog output module.
  • Page 671 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED display (status and error displays) of the AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 analog output module. ① Diagnostic status (DIAG) (red/green) ② Channel status (0, 1, 2 and 3) (green) Figure 2-126  LED displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables set out the meaning of the status and error displays.
  • Page 672 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts DIAG LED Table 2-234  Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning No supply voltage 1L+ • Module parameters not assigned (after switching on the supply voltage 1L+) • Loading firmware Flashes (while the firmware update is being performed, all LEDs retain their current status) •...
  • Page 673 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event, a diagnostics alarm is issued and the DIAG LED flashes red on the analog output module. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. The following tables show the diagnostics alarms for all measuring ranges.
  • Page 674 Technical specifications of the AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 analog output module The following table shows the technical specifications as of the issue date. You will find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0 General information  ...
  • Page 675 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0 Analog outputs   Number of analog outputs Voltage output, short-circuit protection Voltage output, short-circuit current, max. 24 mA Current output, no-load voltage, max. 15 V Cycle time (all channels) max. 1 ms Output ranges, voltage   • 0 to 10 V Yes;...
  • Page 676 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0 Errors/accuracies   Output ripple (relative to output range, band­ 0.02 % width 0 to 50 kHz), (+/-) Linearity error (relative to output range), (+/-) 0.1 % Temperature error (relative to output range), 0.005 %/K (+/-) Crosstalk between the outputs, max. -70 dB Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 °C (relat­...
  • Page 677 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0 Highest safety class achievable for safety-   related tripping of standard modules • Performance level according to ISO PL d 13849-1 • Category according to ISO 13849-1 Cat. 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 •...
  • Page 678 Additional information You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy" section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254863) and the "Saving energy with PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856). Application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454) are also available on the Internet.
  • Page 679 PROFIenergy 7.2 Response of analog output module Response of analog output module Display The channel status LEDs are not affected by PROFIenergy. Response to error detection All channels that are in pause mode on "PE_MODE_PROCEED" report their diagnostic status as in productive mode.
  • Page 680 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 analog output module in front and side view. Figure 2-127  Dimension drawing Analog output module AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 (6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E38687953-AC...
  • Page 681 Representation of analog values This appendix shows the analog values for all output ranges supported by the AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 analog output module. Measured value resolution The digitized analog value is the same for all output values at the same nominal range. Analog values are output as fixed point numbers in two's complement.
  • Page 682 Representation of analog values 9.1 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges Table 2-240  Voltage output range 0 V to 10 V Values Voltage output range Range Dec. Hex. 0 V to 10 V 118.519% 32767 7FFF 11.76 V Maximum output value 32512 7F00 117.589% 32511...
  • Page 683 Representation of analog values 9.2 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges Representation of analog values in the current output ranges The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current output ranges. Table 2-242  Current output range +/-20 mA Values Current output range Range...
  • Page 684 Representation of analog values 9.2 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges Values Current output range Range 29377 72C1 21 mA Maximum output value 106.25% 29376 72C0 21 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 20 mA + 578.7 nA 100% 27648 6C00 20 mA...
  • Page 685 Manual SIMATIC ET 200AL Communication module CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 (6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0) Edition 04/2021 support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 686 Documentation guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 Parameters/address space (6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0) Diagnostics alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications Replacing modules PROFIenergy Dimension drawing 04/2021 A5E32352322-AE...
  • Page 688 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 689 Table of contents Documentation guide......................... 18 Product overview........................812,1184 Properties......................... 812,1184 Operator controls and display elements..............815,1187 Functions......................... 816,1188 Reset communication module to factory settings............... 273 Wiring............................817,1189 Terminal and block diagram..................818,1190 Pin assignment......................819,1191 Parameters/address space......................822,1194 Parameters....................... 822,1194 Explanation of the parameters..................
  • Page 690 ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). Manual Collection ET 200AL The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 691 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of these to your own manual.
  • Page 692 You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300). PRONETA With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the system network during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions: • The topology overview independently scans the PROFINET network and all connected components.
  • Page 693 Documentation guide SINETPLAN SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition, SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves.
  • Page 694 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0 View of the module Figure 2-128  View of the CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 communication module CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 (6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 04/2021, A5E32352322-AE...
  • Page 695 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: • IO-Link Master according to IO-Link specification V1.1 • 4 ports, type class B • 4 M12 connectors • SIO mode (standard IO mode) • Supported data transmission rates: –...
  • Page 696 • Stripping Tool for ET-Connection • M8 sealing cap • M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual. CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 (6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 04/2021, A5E32352322-AE...
  • Page 697 Product overview 2.2 Operator controls and display elements Operator controls and display elements The following figure shows the operator controls and display elements of the CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 communication module. ① DIAG: LED display for mode and diagnostic status ② C1 to C4: LED displays for port status ③...
  • Page 698 24 V DC technology. Reference For more information on the IO-Link system, please see the IO-Link system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/65949252) function manual. Reset communication module to factory settings Effects of resetting to the factory settings Use the "Reset to factory settings" function to restore the parameter assignments of your CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 communication module made with S7-PCT to the factory state.
  • Page 699 Wiring CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 (6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 04/2021, A5E32352322-AE...
  • Page 700 Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram Terminal and block diagram The following figure shows an example of the pin assignment for Port Class A (Type A) and Port Class B (Type b). ① SIO input Loop-through of the ET-Connection ② SIO output Supply voltage 1L+ (non-switched) ③...
  • Page 701 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment NOTE Color coding The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables. Pin assignment of the IO-Link sockets NOTE Port Class B The pin assignment of the IO-Link interface corresponds to the IO-Link specification as per Port Class B.
  • Page 702 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment of the sockets for ET-Connection The table below shows the pin assignments of the 2 sockets for the connection of ET‑Connection. Table 2-247  Pin assignment for ET-Connection Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the sockets wire color of the X30 socket X31 socket...
  • Page 703 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment of the socket for loop-through of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the socket for loop-through of the supply voltage. Table 2-249  Pin assignment of the supply voltage socket Assignment Assignment of the Front view of the wire color of the...
  • Page 704 Parameters/address space Parameters Parameters The following table shows the general parameters for the communication module CM 4xIO‑Link 4xM12. Table 2-250  General parameters Parameters Range of values Default Scope Diagnostics Diagnostics: No supply • Disable Disable Module voltage 2L+ • Enable Diagnostics port 1 • Disable Disable Channel...
  • Page 705 Parameters/address space 4.1 Parameters The following table shows the port parameters for the communication module CM 4xIO‑Link 4xM12 with firmware version V1.1. Table 2-251  Port parameters Parameters Range of values Default Port configuration Operating mode • IO-Link autostart IO-Link autostart • IO-Link manual •...
  • Page 706 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of the parameters Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics: No supply voltage 2L+ Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage 2L+. Diagnostics port This parameter enables the diagnostics for the selected port. The diagnostics possible depends on the IO-Link device in use. Additional information about the diagnostic interrupts can be found in the description of the utilized IO-Link device.
  • Page 707 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of the parameters You can find the Vendor ID and Device ID on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109748852). The port is operating as a standard digital input. The port is operating as a standard digital output. Disabled The port is disabled.
  • Page 708 Parameters/address space 4.2 Explanation of the parameters Port configuration You can use a CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 communication module as of firmware version V1.1 to commission the IO-Link ports of the IO-Link master or the connected IO-Link devices in two different ways: •...
  • Page 709 The following figure show the structure of the PQI byte. You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". Figure 2-131  Structure of the PQI byte Reference For more information, please refer to the IO-Link system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/65949252) function manual. CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 (6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 04/2021, A5E32352322-AE...
  • Page 710 Diagnostics alarms Status and error displays LED displays The following figure shows the LED display of the CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 communication module. ① Diagnostics (DIAG) (green/red) ② Port status / IO-Link status (Cn) (green) ③ Load voltage 2L+ (PWR) (green) ④ Channel status in SIO mode (Qn) (green) Figure 2-132  LED displays Meaning of the LEDs...
  • Page 711 Diagnostics alarms 5.1 Status and error displays DIAG LED Table 2-253  Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning No supply voltage 1L+ • Module parameters not assigned (after switching on the supply voltage 1L+) Flashes • Loading firmware (while the firmware update is being performed, all LEDs retain their cur­ rent status) •...
  • Page 712 Diagnostics alarms 5.2 Diagnostics alarms LEDs Qn Valid for IO-Link port in SIO mode. Table 2-256  Status displays of the Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 LEDs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 LEDs Meaning Process signal = 0 in SIO mode, deactivated or in IO-Link mode Process signal = 1 in SIO mode Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event, a diagnostics alarm is issued and the DIAG LED flashes red on the...
  • Page 713 Diagnostics alarms 5.2 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics Error Meaning (IO-Link error code) IO-Link IO-Link alarm code master device Defective fuse • Fuse on device is defective (5101 Safety shutdown • Serious error (master has to be replaced) (1880 External fault • Error during data backup (1809 , 180A , 180B...
  • Page 714 Technical specifications Technical specifications of the CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 communication module The following table shows the technical specifications as of 03/2021. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/pv/6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0 General information  ...
  • Page 715 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0 24 V encoder supply   • Short-circuit protection Yes; per module, electronic Output current, max. 1.4 A; Total current of all ports • Power loss   Power loss, typ. 2.6 W IO-Link   Number of ports • of which simultaneously controllable IO-Link protocol 1.0 IO-Link protocol 1.1...
  • Page 716 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0 Potential separation channels   • between the channels between the channels and backplane bus • • between the channels and the power sup­ ply of the electronics Isolation   Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates  ...
  • Page 717 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/65949252) function manual. Reference You will find additional information on replacing modules in the system manual ET 200AL dis­ tributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) in the "Module" section. You will find additional information on replacing IO-Link masters in the S7‑PCT online help.
  • Page 718 Additional information You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy" section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254863) and the "Saving energy with PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856). Application examples (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/41986454) are also available on the Internet.
  • Page 719 PROFIenergy 8.2 DI operating mode DI operating mode Display If no external supply voltage is connected, switching off supply voltages 1U and 2U also leads to switching off the associated channel status LED Qn. Response to error detection All channels that are in pause mode on "PE_MODE_PROCEED" report their diagnostic status as in productive mode.
  • Page 720 PROFIenergy 8.3 DQ operating mode DQ operating mode Display The channel status LEDs Qn show the output value. Response to error detection All channels that are in pause mode on "PE_MODE_PROCEED" report their diagnostic status as in productive mode. The following applies for all channels which switch to a different pause mode: •...
  • Page 721 PROFIenergy 8.4 IO-Link operating mode IO-Link operating mode Display Switching off the supply voltage 1U also switches off the associated port status LED Cn. Response to error detection All channels which are set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" and "PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE" in pause mode report errors as in productive operation. The following conditions apply to all channels (ports) which switch to a different pause mode ("PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN"...
  • Page 722 Dimension drawing The following figure shows the dimension drawing of the CM 4xIO‑Link 4xM12 communication module in front and side view. Figure 2-133  Dimension drawing CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 (6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, 04/2021, A5E32352322-AE...
  • Page 723 Manual SIMATIC ET 200AL IO-Link Digital input module DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 (6ES7141-5BF00-0BL0) Edition 08/2021 support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 724 ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL IO-Link digital input module DI Parameters/address space 8x24VDC 8xM8 (6ES7141-5BF00-0BL0) Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications Dimension drawing 08/2021 A5E47926568-AB...
  • Page 726 In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks.
  • Page 727 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 728 Table of contents ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules Documentation Guide................ 847 Product overview..........................850 Properties......................... 850 Operator controls and display elements................852 Wiring..............................853 Terminal and block diagram....................853 Pin assignment......................... 854 Parameters/address space........................855 Parameters........................855 Explanation of the parameters..................855 Address space........................
  • Page 729 The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC IO-Link system. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). ET 200AL Manual Collection The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 730 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 731 You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109767888). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA has two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 732 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7141-5BF00-0BL0 View of the module Figure 2-134  View of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 IO-Link digital input module IO-Link digital input module DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 (6ES7141-5BF00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47926568-AB...
  • Page 733 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: • 8 digital inputs • M8 sockets for connection of sensors • 24 V DC supply voltage • Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module • Typical input delay of 3 ms •...
  • Page 734 Product overview 2.2 Operator controls and display elements See also ET 200AL system manual (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109773203) Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 IO-Link digital input module. DI 8x24VDC ET 200AL DIAG ①...
  • Page 735 Wiring Terminal and block diagram The following figure shows an example of the pin assignment of signal outputs with 2- and 3-wire connection. ① 2-wire connection Supply voltage 1L+ (non-switched) ② 3-wire connection Ground 1M (non-switched) ③ DI circuit 24 V encoder supply ④...
  • Page 736 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment Pin assignment of the sockets for digital inputs The table below shows the pin assignment of the 8 sockets for the connection of digital inputs. Table 2-261  Pin assignment for digital inputs Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X17 sockets for digital inputs X10, X12, X14, X16 X11, X13, X15, X17 24 V encoder supply 1U...
  • Page 737 Parameters/address space Parameters The following table shows the parameters for the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 IO-Link digital input module. Table 2-263  Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope ISDU ISDU index subindex Value Dec. Hex. (decimal) (decimal) Diagnostics: Short-circuit to Disable Disable Module ground Enable 255 FF Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground...

  • Page 738: Electronic Data Sheet (Eds)

    The structure of the IODD is identical for all devices from all manufacturers. The structure of the IODD is always represented in the identical manner by the IO-Link Configuration Tool of the master manufacturer (for Siemens, S7-PCT). This ensures that the handling is the same for all IO-Link devices regardless of the manufacturer.
  • Page 739 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 IO-Link digital input module. DI 8x24VDC ET 200AL DIAG ① Diagnostic status (DIAG) (red/green) ② Channel status (0 to 7) (green) Figure 2-138  LED displays Meaning of the LEDs...
  • Page 740 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts DIAG LED Table 2-264  Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning No supply voltage 1L+ • No data exchange with the IO-Link Master, for example, due to wire break • Firmware is loading Flashes Module is currently exchanging data with the IO-Link master and no module diagnostics Module is currently exchanging data with the IO-Link master and module dia­...
  • Page 741 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event, a diagnostics alarm is issued and the DIAG LED flashes red on the digital input module. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 2-266  Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning...
  • Page 742 Technical specifications of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 IO-Link digital input module The following table shows the technical specifications as of the issue date. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/pv/6ES7141-5BF00-0BL0/td?dl=de). Article number 6ES7141-5BF00-0BL0 General information  ...
  • Page 743 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7141-5BF00-0BL0 Input voltage   • Rated value (DC) 24 V for signal "0" -30 to +5 V • • for signal "1" +11 to +30V Input current   • for signal "1", typ. 3 mA Input delay (for rated value of input  ...
  • Page 744 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7141-5BF00-0BL0 Potential separation   Potential separation channels   • between the channels between the channels and the power sup­ • ply of the electronics Isolation   Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Degree and class of protection  ...
  • Page 745 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 IO-Link digital input module in front and side view. DI 8x24VDC ET 200AL DIAG Figure 2-139  Dimension drawing IO-Link digital input module DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 (6ES7141-5BF00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47926568-AB...
  • Page 746 Manual SIMATIC ET 200AL IO-Link Digital Input module DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 (6ES7141-5AH00-0BL0) Edition 08/2021 support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 747 ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL IO-Link digital input module DI Parameters/address space 16x24VDC 8xM12 (6ES7141-5AH00-0BL0) Interrupts/diagnostic alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications Dimension drawing 08/2021 A5E47926661-AB...
  • Page 749 In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks.
  • Page 750 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 751 Table of contents ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules Documentation Guide................ 870 Product overview..........................873 Properties......................... 873 Operator controls and display elements................875 Wiring..............................876 Terminal and block diagram....................876 Pin assignment......................... 877 Parameters/address space........................879 Parameters........................879 Explanation of the parameters..................879 Address space......................
  • Page 752 The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC IO-Link system. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). ET 200AL Manual Collection The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 753 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 754 You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109767888). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA has two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 755 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7141-5AH00-0BL0 View of the module Figure 2-140  View of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 IO‑Link digital input module IO-Link digital input module DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 (6ES7141-5AH00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47926661-AB...
  • Page 756 • M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109773203) IO-Link I/O modules system manual. IO-Link digital input module DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 (6ES7141-5AH00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47926661-AB...
  • Page 757 Product overview 2.2 Operator controls and display elements Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 IO‑Link digital input module. DI 16x24VDC ET 200AL DIAG ① DIAG: LED display for the diagnostic status ②...
  • Page 758 Wiring Terminal and block diagram The figure below shows an example of the pin assignment of signal inputs with 2-wire and 3-wire connection. ① 3-wire connection Supply voltage 1L+ (non-switched) ② 2-wire connection Ground 1M (non-switched) ③ 2-wire connection 24 V encoder supply ④...
  • Page 759 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment Pin assignment of the sockets for digital inputs The table below shows the pin assignment of the 8 sockets for the connection of digital inputs. Table 2-267  Pin assignment for digital inputs Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X17 sockets for digital inputs X10, X12, X11, X13,...
  • Page 760 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Assignment Front view of the connector (Port Class Ground 1M Switching and communication cable (C/Q) Unassigned NOTE Note that the module can only be supplied with a protective low voltage according to the standard SELV/PELV. IO-Link digital input module DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 (6ES7141-5AH00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47926661-AB...
  • Page 761 Parameters/address space Parameters The following table shows the parameters for the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 IO-Link digital input module. Table 2-269  Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope ISDU ISDU index subindex Value Dec. Hex. (hexa­ (hexa­ decimal) decimal) Diagnostics: Short-circuit to Disable Disable Module ground Enable 255 FF...
  • Page 762 The structure of the IODD is identical for all devices from all manufacturers. The structure of the IODD is always represented in the same manner by the IO-Link Configuration Tool of the master manufacturer (for Siemens, S7-PCT). This ensures that the handling is the same for all IO-Link devices regardless of the manufacturer.
  • Page 763 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 IO‑Link digital input module. DI 16x24VDC ET 200AL DIAG ① Diagnostic status (DIAG) (red/green) ② Channel status (0 to 15) (green) Figure 2-144  LED displays Meaning of the LEDs...
  • Page 764 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.2 Interrupts DIAG LED Table 2-270  Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning No supply voltage 1L+ • No data exchange with the IO-Link master (e.g. wire break) • Firmware is loading Flashes Module is currently exchanging data with the IO-Link master and no module diagnostics Module is currently exchanging data with the IO-Link master and module dia­...
  • Page 765 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event, a diagnostics alarm is issued and the LED DIAG flashes red on the digital input module. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, from the status of the IO-Link master.
  • Page 766 Technical specifications of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 IO‑Link digital input module The following table shows the technical specifications as of the issue date. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/pv/6ES7141-5AH00-0BL0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7141-5AH00-0BL0 General information  ...
  • Page 767 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7141-5AH00-0BL0 Input voltage   • Rated value (DC) 24 V for signal "0" -30 to +5 V • • for signal "1" +11 to +30V Input current   • for signal "1", typ. 3 mA Input delay (for rated value of input  ...
  • Page 768 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7141-5AH00-0BL0 Potential separation   Potential separation channels   • between the channels between the channels and the power sup­ • ply of the electronics Isolation   Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Degree and class of protection  ...
  • Page 769 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 IO‑Link digital input module in front and side view. DI 16x24VDC ET 200AL DIAG Figure 2-145  Dimension drawing IO-Link digital input module DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 (6ES7141-5AH00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47926661-AB...
  • Page 770 Manual SIMATIC ET 200AL IO-Link Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 (6ES7142-5AF00-0BL0) Edition 08/2021 support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 771 ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL IO-Link digital output module DQ Parameters/address space 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 (6ES7142-5AF00-0BL0) Interrupts/diagnostic alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications Dimension drawing 08/2021 A5E47926730-AB...
  • Page 773 In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks.
  • Page 774 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 775 Table of contents ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules Documentation Guide..............894,946 Product overview......................... 897,949 Properties......................... 179 Operator controls and display elements................899 Wiring..............................900 Terminal and block diagram....................900 Pin assignment......................... 901 Parameters/address space........................903 Parameters........................903 Explanation of the parameters..................903 Address space........................
  • Page 776 The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC IO-Link system. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). ET 200AL Manual Collection The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 777 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 778 You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109767888). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA has two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 779 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7142-5AF00-0BL0 View of the module Figure 2-146  View of the DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 IO‑Link digital output module IO-Link digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 (6ES7142-5AF00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47926730-AB...
  • Page 780 • M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109773203) IO-Link I/O modules system manual. IO-Link digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 (6ES7142-5AF00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47926730-AB...
  • Page 781 Product overview 2.2 Operator controls and display elements Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the IO‑Link DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 digital output module. DQ 8x24VDC/2A ET 200AL DIAG ① DIAG: LED display for the diagnostic status ②...
  • Page 782 Wiring Terminal and block diagram The example in the figure below shows the pin assignment of signal outputs. ① Output to 2L+ Supply voltage 1L+ (non-switched) ② DQ circuit Ground 1M (non-switched) ③ Microcontroller Load voltage 2L+ (switched) ④ Monitoring Ground 2M (switched) ⑤...
  • Page 783 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment Pin assignment of the sockets for digital outputs The table below shows the pin assignment of the 8 sockets for the connection of the digital outputs. Table 2-273  Pin assignment for digital outputs Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X17 sockets for digital outputs X10, X12, X14, X16 X11, X13, X15, X17 Unassigned...
  • Page 784 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment of the connector for IO-Link The following table shows the pin assignment of the connector for IO-Link. The IO-Link interface corresponds to the specification according to port Class A. Table 2-275  Pin assignment of the IO-Link interface Assignment Front view of the connector (Port Class Unassigned...
  • Page 785 Parameters/address space Parameters The following table shows the parameters for the DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 IO-Link digital output module. Table 2-276  Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope ISDU ISDU index subindex Value Dec. Hex. (decimal) (decimal) Diagnostics: Missing load voltage Disable Disable Module Enable 255 FF Diagnostics: Short-circuit to Disable...
  • Page 786 The structure of the IODD is identical for all devices from all manufacturers. The structure of the IODD is always represented in the same manner by the IO-Link Configuration Tool of the master manufacturer (for Siemens, S7-PCT). This ensures that the handling is the same for all IO-Link devices regardless of the manufacturer.
  • Page 787 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 IO‑Link digital output module. DQ 8x24VDC/2A ET 200AL DIAG ① Diagnostic status (DIAG) (red/green) ② Channel status (0 to 7) (green) ③...
  • Page 788 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.2 Interrupts DIAG LED Table 2-277  Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning No supply voltage 1L+ • No data exchange with the IO-Link Master (e.g. wire break) • Firmware is loading Flashes Module is currently exchanging data with the IO-Link master and no module diagnostics Module is currently exchanging data with the IO-Link master and module dia­...
  • Page 789 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event, a diagnostics alarm is issued and the LED DIAG flashes red on the digital output module. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, from the status of the IO-Link master. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program. Table 2-280  Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning...
  • Page 790 Technical specifications of the DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 IO‑Link digital output module The following table shows the technical specifications as of the issue date. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/pv/6ES7142-5AF00-0BL0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7142-5AF00-0BL0 General information  ...
  • Page 791 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7142-5AF00-0BL0 Output voltage   • for signal "1", min. L+ (-0.8 V) Output current   for signal "1" rated value 2 A (45 °C); 1 A (55 °C) • • for signal "1" permissible range, max. 2 A;...
  • Page 792 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7142-5AF00-0BL0 Isolation   Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates   Suitable for safety-related tripping of standard Yes; From FS01 modules Highest safety class achievable for safety-   related tripping of standard modules •...
  • Page 793 Technical specifications Derating curve The following figure show the load current derating with mounting clearance observed, depending on the ambient temperature. Figure 2-151  Derating curve IO‑Link digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 IO-Link digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 (6ES7142-5AF00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47926730-AB...
  • Page 794 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 IO‑Link digital output module in front and side views. DQ 8x24VDC/2A ET 200AL DIAG Figure 2-152  Dimension drawing IO-Link digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 (6ES7142-5AF00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47926730-AB...
  • Page 795 Manual SIMATIC ET 200AL IO-Link Digital input / output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A 8xM8 (6ES7143-5BF00-0BL0) Edition 08/2021 support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 796 ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL IO-Link digital input/digital Parameters/address space output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A 8xM8 (6ES7143-5BF00-0BL0) Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications Dimension drawing 08/2021 A5E47925743-AB...
  • Page 798 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no...
  • Page 799 To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). IO-Link digital input/digital output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A 8xM8 (6ES7143-5BF00-0BL0)
  • Page 800 Table of contents ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules Documentation Guide................ 919 Product overview..........................922 Properties......................... 922 Operator controls and display elements................924 Wiring..............................925 Terminal and block diagram..................926,2443 Pin assignment......................... 927 Parameters/address space........................929 Parameters........................929 Explanation of the parameters..................929 Address space........................
  • Page 801 The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC IO-Link system. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). ET 200AL Manual Collection The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 802 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 803 You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109767888). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA has two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 804 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7143-5BF00-0BL0 View of the module Figure 2-153  View of the DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A 8xM8 IO-Link digital input/digital output module IO-Link digital input/digital output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A 8xM8 (6ES7143-5BF00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47925743-AB...
  • Page 805 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: • 4 digital inputs or digital outputs and 4 digital outputs, depending on parameter assignment – DIQ signals connected to 2L+ (switched) – DQ signals connected to 2L+ (switched) •...
  • Page 806 See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109773203) IO-Link I/O modules system manual. Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A 8xM8 IO-Link digital input/digital output module.
  • Page 807 Wiring IO-Link digital input/digital output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A 8xM8 (6ES7143-5BF00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47925743-AB...
  • Page 808 Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram Terminal and block diagram The following figure shows an example of the pin assignment of signal inputs with 2- and 3-wire connection as well as signal outputs. ① Configured as output Supply voltage 1L+ (non-switched) ②...
  • Page 809 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment Pin assignment of the sockets for digital inputs/digital outputs The tables below show the pin assignments of the 8 sockets for connection of the digital inputs/digital outputs. Table 2-281  Pin assignment for digital inputs/digital outputs Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X13 - sockets for digital inputs / out­...
  • Page 810 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Assignment Front view of the connector (Port Class Ground 1M Switching and communication cable (C/Q) Ground 2M NOTE Note that the module can only be supplied with a protective low voltage according to the standard SELV/PELV. IO-Link digital input/digital output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A 8xM8 (6ES7143-5BF00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47925743-AB...
  • Page 811 Parameters/address space Parameters The following table shows the parameters for the DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A 8xM8 IO-Link digital input / digital output module. Table 2-284  Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope ISDU ISDU index subindex Value Dec. Hex. (decimal) (decimal) Diagnostics: Missing load voltage Disable Disable Module Enable...
  • Page 812 Parameters/address space 4.3 Address space Reaction to CPU/master STOP With this parameter, you set the reaction of the digital outputs of the digital input/ digital output module after a CPU/master STOP: • Shut down: The digital output is de-energized. • Keep last value: The last value of the digital output remains activated. •...
  • Page 813 The structure of the IODD is identical for all devices from all manufacturers. The structure of the IODD is always represented in the same manner by the IO-Link Configuration Tool of the master manufacturer (for Siemens, S7-PCT). This ensures that the handling is the same for all IO-Link devices regardless of the manufacturer.
  • Page 814 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A 8xM8 IO-Link digital input / digital output module. DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A ET 200AL DIAG ① Diagnostic status (DIAG) (red/green) ②...
  • Page 815 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.2 Interrupts DIAG LED Table 2-285  Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning No supply voltage 1L+ • No data exchange with the IO-Link Master, for example, due to wire break • Firmware is loading Flashes Module is currently exchanging data with the IO-Link master and no module diagnostics Module is currently exchanging data with the IO-Link master and module dia­...
  • Page 816 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event, a diagnostics alarm is issued and the DIAG LED flashes red on the digital input/output module. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, from the port status of the IO-Link master.
  • Page 817 Technical specifications of the DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A 8xM8 IO-Link digital input / digital output module The following table shows the technical specifications as of the issue date. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/pv/6ES7143-5BF00-0BL0/td?dl=de). Article number 6ES7143-5BF00-0BL0 General information  ...
  • Page 818 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7143-5BF00-0BL0 Digital inputs   Number of digital inputs 4; Parameterizable as DIQ Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 Number of simultaneously controllable   inputs all mounting positions   – up to 55 °C, max. Input voltage  ...
  • Page 819 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7143-5BF00-0BL0 Switching frequency   • with resistive load, max. 100 Hz with inductive load, max. 0.5 Hz • • on lamp load, max. 1 Hz Total current of the outputs   • Current per module, max. 4 A Cable length  ...
  • Page 820 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7143-5BF00-0BL0 Isolation   Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates   Suitable for safety-related tripping of standard Yes; From FS01 modules Highest safety class achievable for safety-   related tripping of standard modules •...
  • Page 821 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A 8xM8 IO-Link digital input / digital output module in front and side view. DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A ET 200AL DIAG Figure 2-158  Dimension drawing IO-Link digital input/digital output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A 8xM8 (6ES7143-5BF00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47925743-AB...
  • Page 822 Manual SIMATIC ET 200AL IO-Link Digital input / output module DIQ 16x24VDC/0,5A 8xM12 (6ES7143-5AH00-0BL0) Edition 08/2021 support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 823 ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules Documentation Guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL IO-Link digital input/digital Parameters/address space output module DIQ 16x24VDC/0,5A 8xM12 (6ES7143-5AH00-0BL0) Interrupts/diagnostic alarms Equipment Manual Technical specifications Dimension drawing 08/2021 A5E47926885-AB...
  • Page 825 In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept. Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks.
  • Page 826 Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.
  • Page 827 Table of contents ET 200AL IO-Link I/O modules Documentation Guide................ 893 Product overview..........................896 Properties........................179-896 Operator controls and display elements................951 Wiring..............................952 Terminal and block diagram....................953 Pin assignment......................... 954 Parameters/address space........................955 Parameters........................955 Explanation of the parameters..................955 Address space........................
  • Page 828 The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC IO-Link system. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). ET 200AL Manual Collection The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 829 You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport". You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en). "mySupport" - Documentation With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online Support.
  • Page 830 You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109767888). PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis) allows you to analyze the plant network during commissioning. PRONETA has two core functions: • The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components.
  • Page 831 Product overview Properties Article number 6ES7143-5AH00-0BL0 View of the module Figure 2-159  View of the  DIQ 16x24VDC/0,5A 8xM12 IO‑Link digital input/digital output module IO-Link digital input/digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC/0,5A 8xM12 (6ES7143-5AH00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47926885-AB...
  • Page 832 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: • 16 digital inputs or digital outputs, depending on configuration and parameter assignment – 16 DIQ signals connected to 2L+ (switched) • M12 sockets for connection of sensors and actuators •...
  • Page 833 See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/89254965) IO-Link I/O modules system manual. Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the DIQ 16x24VDC/0,5A 8xM12 IO-Link digital input/digital output module.
  • Page 834 Wiring IO-Link digital input/digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC/0,5A 8xM12 (6ES7143-5AH00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47926885-AB...
  • Page 835 Wiring 3.1 Terminal and block diagram Terminal and block diagram The figure below shows an example of the pin assignment of signal inputs with 2-wire and 3-wire connection and of signal outputs in the configuration modes for digital inputs and outputs.
  • Page 836 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Pin assignment Pin assignment of the sockets for digital inputs/digital outputs The table below shows the pin assignments of the 8 sockets for the connection of the digital inputs/digital outputs. Table 2-289  Pin assignment for digital inputs/digital outputs Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X17 - sockets for digital inputs/outputs...
  • Page 837 Parameters/address space Parameters The table below shows the parameters for the IO‑Link digital input/digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC/0,5A 8xM12. Table 2-291  Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope ISDU ISDU index subindex Value Dec. Hex. (decimal) (decimal) Diagnostics: Missing load voltage Disable Disable Module Enable 255 FF Diagnostics: Short-circuit to...
  • Page 838 Parameters/address space 4.4 IODD parameters Reaction to CPU/master STOP With this parameter, you set the reaction of the channels configured as output of the digital input/output module after a CPU/master STOP: • Deactivate: The digital output is de-energized. • Keep last value: The last value of the digital output remains activated. •...
  • Page 839 The structure of the IODD is identical for all devices from all manufacturers. The structure of the IODD is always represented in the same manner by the IO-Link Configuration Tool of the master manufacturer (for Siemens, S7-PCT). This ensures that the handling is the same for all IO-Link devices regardless of the manufacturer.
  • Page 840 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DIQ 16x24VDC/0,5A 8xM12 IO-Link digital input/digital output module. DIQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ET 200AL DIAG ① Diagnostic status (DIAG) (red/green) ② Channel status (0 to 15) (green) ③...
  • Page 841 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.2 Interrupts DIAG LED Table 2-292  Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning No supply voltage 1L+ • No data exchange with the IO-Link Master (e.g. wire break) • Firmware is loading Flashes Module is currently exchanging data with the IO-Link master and no module diagnostics Module is currently exchanging data with the IO-Link master and module dia­...
  • Page 842 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5.3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event, a diagnostics alarm is issued and the LED DIAG flashes red on the digital input/digital output module. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, from the status of the IO-Link master. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.
  • Page 843 Technical specifications of the DIQ 16x24VDC/0,5A 8xM12 IO‑Link digital input/digital output module The following table shows the technical specifications as of the issue date. You can find a data sheet including daily updated technical specifications on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/pv/6ES7143-5AH00-0BL0/td?dl=en). Article number 6ES7143-5AH00-0BL0 General information  ...
  • Page 844 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7143-5AH00-0BL0 Digital inputs   Number of digital inputs 16; Parameterizable as DIQ Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131, type 3 Number of simultaneously controllable   inputs all mounting positions   – up to 55 °C, max. Input voltage  ...
  • Page 845 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7143-5AH00-0BL0 Switching frequency   • with resistive load, max. 100 Hz with inductive load, max. 0.5 Hz • • on lamp load, max. 1 Hz Total current of the outputs   • Current per module, max. 4 A Cable length  ...
  • Page 846 Technical specifications Article number 6ES7143-5AH00-0BL0 Isolation   Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test) Standards, approvals, certificates   Suitable for safety-related tripping of standard Yes; From FS01 modules Highest safety class achievable for safety-   related tripping of standard modules •...
  • Page 847 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DIQ 16x24VDC/0,5A 8xM12 IO‑Link digital input/digital output module in front and side view. DIQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ET 200AL DIAG Figure 2-164  Dimension drawing IO-Link digital input/digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC/0,5A 8xM12 (6ES7143-5AH00-0BL0) Equipment Manual, 08/2021, A5E47926885-AB...
  • Page 848 SIMATIC ET 200AL Digital I/O module F-DI 4+F-DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12 (6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0) Manual Edition 03/2022 Answers for industry.
  • Page 849 Documentation guide Product overview SIMATIC Wiring ET 200AL Digital I/O module F-DI 4+F-DQ Parameters/address space 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12 (6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0) Applications of the F-I/O module Equipment Manual Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics Technical specifications Dimension drawing Response times Switching of loads V1.0, 03/2022 A5E51082342-AB...
  • Page 851 (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are Digital I/O module F-DI 4+F-DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12 (6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, V1.0, 03/2022, A5E51082342-AB...
  • Page 852 To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed visit (https://www.siemens.com/cert). Digital I/O module F-DI 4+F-DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12 (6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0)
  • Page 853 Table of contents Documentation guide......................... 973 Product overview..........................975 Properties......................... 975 Operator controls and display elements................978 Fail-safe digital inputs....................... 979 Fail-safe digital outputs..................... 980 Wiring..............................981 Terminal and block diagram....................981 Pin assignment......................... 982 Connecting the M12 eCoding plug..................984 Parameters/address space........................

  • Page 854: Table Of Contents

    Table of contents Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics..................1023 Reactions to faults......................1023 Fault diagnostics overview..................1026,2026 Diagnostics performed at startup..................1027 Diagnostics by LED display....................1028 6.4.1 Status and error displays....................1028 Fault types, causes, and corrective measures..............1031 Technical specifications........................1037 Specifications........................
  • Page 855 SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web server. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667). Manual Collection ET 200AL The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
  • Page 856 • Safety Evaluation Tool - assists you in determining required safety levels • Functional Examples - guides you in your safety applications • Siemens training (SITRAIN) classes - offers training in safety standards and products • SIMATIC STEP 7 Safety Advance F‑Execution Times, F‑Runtimes, F‑Monitoring and Reaction...
  • Page 857 Product overview Properties Article Number 6ES7146‑5FF00‑0BA0 View of the Module Figure 2-165  View of the F-DI 4+F-DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12 Fail‑Safe I/O module Digital I/O module F-DI 4+F-DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12 (6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, V1.0, 03/2022, A5E51082342-AB...
  • Page 858 Product overview 2.1 Properties Properties The module has the following technical properties: • Four fail‑safe digital inputs and two fail‑safe digital outputs (M12 sockets for connection of sensors and actuators) • One eCoding connection (M12 socket for eCoding plug) • Two power ports, infeed and loop-through, which contain both logic and input power (1L+) and output power (2L+) (M8 module supply voltage ports) •...
  • Page 859 • M8 sealing cap • M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in "Accessories/spare parts" in the ET 200AL distributed I/O system system manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965). Digital I/O module F-DI 4+F-DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12 (6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0) Equipment Manual, V1.0, 03/2022, A5E51082342-AB...
  • Page 860 Product overview 2.2 Operator controls and display elements Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module: ① DIAG: LED display for the diagnostic status ② LED displays for the channel status ③...
  • Page 861 Fail-safe digital inputs The digital inputs of the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module are rated for connection to 24 V DC sensors/switches and 3/4-wire proximity switches (for example, BEROs: Siemens line of no- touch sensors) and have an EN 61131‑2 type 1 input rating.
  • Page 862 Product overview 2.4 Fail-safe digital outputs Fail-safe digital outputs The digital outputs of the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module are for use in fail‑safe applications and are suitable for various actuators such as the following: • Solenoid valves • DC contactors • Indicator lights The two digital outputs each have P- and M-switches that are rated to connect 24 V DC actuators with up to a 2.0 A rating.
  • Page 863 Wiring WARNING You can come into contact with live electrical wires connected to the main power supply. Death or serious personal injury and damage to machines and equipment may result if proper precautions are not taken. Shut off the supply and load voltage before you wire the fail‑safe module. Terminal and block diagram The following figure shows an example of the pin assignment of signal inputs with 4‑wire connection as well as signal outputs:...
  • Page 864 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment ⑤ eCoding plug Supply voltage 1L+ ⑥ ET‑Connection interface Ground 1M ⑦ Internal supply voltage Load voltage 2L+ ⑧ Outputs Ground 2M ⑨ Inputs: Configured as 1oo1 sensor using Input signal internal sensor supply X10, X12 F‑DI input channels Output signal, P-switch X14, X16...
  • Page 865 Wiring 3.2 Pin assignment Assignment Front view of the sockets X14 and X16 - sockets for fail‑safe digital outputs X14, X16 Output signal DQ -M: Connector X14 Output signal DQ -M: Connector X16 Output signal DQ -P: Connector X14 Output signal DQ -P: Connector X16 Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the sockets for ET‑Connection...
  • Page 866 Wiring 3.3 Connecting the M12 eCoding plug Pin assignment of the socket for loop-through of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the socket for loop-through of the supply voltage: Table 2-300  Pin assignment of the supply voltage socket Assignment Assignment of the wire Front view of the socket...
  • Page 867 Wiring 3.3 Connecting the M12 eCoding plug The eCoding plug stores assigned PROFIsafe source and destination addresses. The "Assign PROFIsafe address option" is selected in STEP 7 during the F-DI 4/F-DQ 2 Fail-Safe module set- up. The module checks the PROFIsafe addresses stored in the eCoding plug against the PROFIsafe reference addresses provided to the module during start-up parameterization.
  • Page 868 (with or without addresses) and the F‑I/O DB in the SIMATIC, Industrial Software, SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming, Programming and Operating Manual on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/54110126). Configuring module I/O properties To configure fail‑safe module I/O properties, follow these steps: 1.
  • Page 869 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Parameters The following table shows the parameters for the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module: Channel Value range Default Parameter reas­ Scope signment in RUN F-parameters Manual assignment of F‑monitoring • disable disable Module time • enable F‑monitoring time 1 to 65535 ms 150 ms Module...
  • Page 870 Parameters/address space 4.2 Parameters Channel Value range Default Parameter reas­ Scope signment in RUN Duration of short-circuit test • 1.6 ms 1.6 ms Channel • 3.2 ms • 6.4 ms • 12.8 ms Channel n, n+2 Sensor evaluation • 1oo1 evaluation 1oo2 evaluation, 2 Channel channel equivalent •...
  • Page 871 4.3.1 F-parameters Information on F-parameters is available in the SIMATIC Safety – Configuring and Programming manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/54110126). Behavior after channel fault Use this parameter to specify whether the entire F-module is passivated or just the faulty channel(s) in the event of channel faults: •...
  • Page 872 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters 4.3.2 DI parameters Short-circuit test You can enable the short-circuit detection for the channels of the F‑module for which "Internal sensor supply" is set. The short-circuit test is only useful if you are using simple switches that do not have their own power supply.
  • Page 873 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Interval for short-circuit test You can specify how often the short-circuit test is executed (Interval) when the "Short-circuit test" check box is selected. The interval defines the period of time between two consecutive sensor supply OFF test pulses. This value is the time between the OFF pulses of the sensor supply.
  • Page 874 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Sensor evaluation You can assign whether “channel n” input operates individually (1oo1) or is paired with its companion channel "n+2" input (1oo2). Defines signal evaluation and wiring definitions. These selections correspond with the various application mode wiring examples.
  • Page 875 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Discrepancy behavior A 1oo2 input configuration allows a logical difference between the two signals, without error, for the configured discrepancy time. You assign the value that is supplied to the safety program in the F-CPU during a discrepancy between two relevant input channels, which means while discrepancy time is running.
  • Page 876 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Input filters The module filters the digital inputs to remove contact bounce and short duration noise. This parameter assigns the duration of the filter time. Channel failure acknowledge Controls whether the channel is automatically reintegrated after a fault clears or requires an acknowledgement (manual) in the user program.
  • Page 877 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Activated You can enable the corresponding channel for signal processing in the safety program. If you disable a channel, channel diagnostics are no longer reported to the F-CPU for the deactivated channel. NOTE Whenever you disable all output channels, you do not have to power 2L+ and 2L+ undervoltage reporting is suspended.
  • Page 878 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters No new process values are switched to the output channels while a test pattern is applied to the outputs. This means that a higher "Maximum readback time" increases the response time of the F-module. WARNING Short-circuit (cross-circuit) detection may not be possible for high frequency signals Through the configured "Maximum readback time", short‑circuits (cross-circuits) to a signal...
  • Page 879 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters For a dark test, one of the output channel's switches is briefly turned OFF while the output channel is active (output signal "1"). As a result, current flow through the output is interrupted for a short time. A sufficiently slow actuator does not respond to this and remains switched on.
  • Page 880 Parameters/address space 4.3 Explanation of parameters Maximum readback time switch on test You can configure the maximum readback time switch on test parameter to assign the maximum time for which the P-switch or the M-switch of a channel that is currently in OFF state can be switched ON during a bit pattern test step.
  • Page 881 Parameters/address space 4.4 Address space Address space NOTE The F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail-Safe module uses more I and Q memory than required for the physical number of inputs and outputs on the module. The extra bytes carry the PROFIsafe safety status and data integrity information.
  • Page 882 Applications of the F-I/O module The PLC system has an extremely low failure rate and therefore contributes only a small part of the total probability of dangerous failure of an automated system. The probability of dangerous failures of the sensors and actuators is typically far larger than the probability of dangerous failure per hour (PFH)/probability of dangerous failure on demand (PFD) of the PLC system.
  • Page 883 Applications of the F-I/O module In addition to the total delay from the safety demand input to the safe actuator response, you must consider these additional time-related factors. Refer to "Maximum response time (Page 1042)" for exact information: • To be assured of a safety response, a safety demand signal from the input sensor lasts long enough to be seen by the safety program.
  • Page 884 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Digital input applications Digital input applications You should consider the application modes presented here along with the features of the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module as described in the overview. Refer to "Fail-safe digital inputs (Page 978)". The main features of the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module digital inputs include the following items: •...
  • Page 885 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Digital input applications Input architectures for achieving Safety Integrity Level (SIL)/Category/Performance Level (PL) The following are the minimum conditions which must be met for achieving the corresponding safety requirements: Table 2-301  Safety Integrity Level (SIL)/Category/Performance Level (PL) requirements Application Sensor  ...
  • Page 886 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Digital input applications F-DI 4/F-DQ 2 Fail-Safe Module Sensor Connection Figure 2-171  F-DI application mode 1: Internal sensor supply (1oo1 evaluation of a single-channel sensor shown) Use Y cable (6ES7194-6KB00-0XA0) for F-DI application mode 1 to connect two single- channel sensors in 1oo1 evaluation as follows: Sensor Connection F-DI 4/F-DQ 2 Fail-Safe Module...
  • Page 887 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Digital input applications F‑DI application mode 2 This application mode uses single-channel sensors with a 1oo1 evaluation. When you use an external sensor supply, the module does not evaluate that channel for short-circuit testing. NOTE To incorporate F-DI application mode 2 into a SIL 2-rated application, ensure the sensors are appropriately qualified devices.
  • Page 888 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Digital input applications 5.1.2 Applications 3 and 4: 1oo2 evaluation of equivalent sensors F‑DI application mode 3 This application mode uses a two-channel sensor or two single-channel sensors in a 1oo2 voting with discrepancy evaluation. When you use an internal sensor supply, you can successfully perform short-circuit detection.
  • Page 889 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Digital input applications Use Y cable (6ES7194-6KB00-0XA0) for F-DI application mode 3 as follows: Sensor Connection F-DI 4/F-DQ 2 Fail-Safe Module Sensor Connection Figure 2-175  F-DI application mode 3: Internal sensor supply (1oo2 evaluation of two single-channel sensors shown) Parameter assignment Parameter name Parameter value...
  • Page 890 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Digital input applications F-DI 4/F-DQ 2 Fail-Safe Module Sensor Connection 24 V DC Seal Pin 2 Pin 1 - NC Seal Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 - NC Cabinet Figure 2-176  F‑DI application mode 4: External sensor supply (1oo2 evaluation of two-channel sensor shown) Parameter assignment Parameter name Parameter value...
  • Page 891 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Digital input applications Sensor Connection F-DI 4/F-DQ 2 Fail-Safe Module Figure 2-177  F-DI application mode 5: Internal sensor supply (1oo2 evaluation of two-channel sensor with nonequivalent outputs shown) Use Y cable (6ES7194-6KA00-0XA0) for application mode 5 as follows: Sensor Connection F-DI 4/F-DQ 2 Fail-Safe Module Sensor Connection...
  • Page 892 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Digital input applications F‑DI application mode 6 This application mode uses a two-channel sensor or two single-channel sensors with two nonequivalent outputs in a 1oo2 voting with discrepancy evaluation. When you use an external sensor supply, the module does not evaluate that channel for short-circuit testing. The application mode uses the following pins: •...
  • Page 893 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Digital input applications 5.1.4 Applications 7 and 8: 1oo2 evaluation of a 4-wire, nonequivalent sensor circuit F‑DI application mode 7 This application mode uses a two-channel sensor or two single-channel sensors in nonequivalent configuration (4-wire connection) in a 1oo2 voting with discrepancy evaluation.
  • Page 894 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Digital input applications Use Y cable (6ES7194-6KB00-0XA0) for application mode 7 as follows: Sensor Connection F-DI 4/F-DQ 2 Fail-Safe Module Sensor Connection Figure 2-181  F‑DI application mode 7: Internal sensor supply (1oo2 evaluation of two single-channel sensors with nonequivalent outputs shown) Parameter assignment Parameter name...
  • Page 895 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.1 Digital input applications F‑DI application mode 8 This application mode uses two single-channel sensors or a two-channel sensor with two nonequivalent outputs in a 1oo2 voting with discrepancy evaluation. When you use an external sensor supply, the module does not evaluate that channel for short-circuit testing. The application mode uses the following pins: •...
  • Page 896 • The external contactors are SIL-rated with sense contacts. • The diagnostics are within limits when you read the sense contacts back and confirm the external contactor response in your program. Siemens recommends using an F‑DI input for sense contact and other safety diagnostic inputs.
  • Page 897 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Digital output applications 5.2.1 Application 1: Wiring a directly-connected SIL-rated actuator The module supports application mode 1, where there is a direct connection of a load between the P and M outputs of one channel. Both switches are opened when de-energizing the load.
  • Page 898 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Digital output applications F-DI 4/F-DQ 2 Fail-Safe Module Actuator Connection 24 V DC Figure 2-184  F‑DQ application mode 2 5.2.3 Application 3: Wiring external contactors: Parallel-connected contactors between P and M The module supports application mode 3, where the module controls the load using the series-connected, normally-open contacts of two relays.
  • Page 899 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.2 Digital output applications 5.2.4 Application 4: Wiring external contactors: Separate output channels for each contactor The module supports application mode 4, where the module controls the load using the series-connected, normally-open contacts of two relays. Connect the coils of both relays across the outputs of two channels.
  • Page 900 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Examples of application modes for the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module Examples of application modes for the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module You can connect field devices to the F-DI 4/F-DQ 2 Fail-Safe module as shown below. Laser scanner (1oo2 evaluation) For the output signal switching device (OSSD) sensors of a Laser Scanner, use F-DI application mode 4 to connect the Laser Scanner output signal switching device with 1oo2 evaluation to...
  • Page 901 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Examples of application modes for the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module Safety doors (1oo1 or 1oo2 evaluation) For the Safety Doors, you can do one of the following: • Use F‑DI application mode 1 with the fail-safe Y cable (6ES7194‑6KB00‑0XA0) to connect two single-channel sensors with 1oo1 evaluation to one input connection of the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module.
  • Page 902 SIL 3 or SIL 2 with the Systematic Capability rules defined in the SIRIUS documentation. For further information, refer to the Industrial Controls, Detecting devices SIRIUS 3SE5/3SF1/3SE66/3SE67 position switches configuration manual on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/43920150). Digital I/O module F-DI 4+F-DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12 (6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0) 1019...
  • Page 903 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Examples of application modes for the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module Connect devices to F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module The figures below are examples of field devices connected to the input and output sockets of the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module: Digital I/O module F-DI 4+F-DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12 (6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0) 1020...
  • Page 904 Applications of the F-I/O module 5.3 Examples of application modes for the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module Digital I/O module F-DI 4+F-DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12 (6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0) 1021 Equipment Manual, V1.0, 03/2022, A5E51082342-AB...

  • Page 905: Interrupts/Diagnostic Messages/Diagnostics

    Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics Reactions to faults Reactions to startup of the fail‑safe system and to faults The fail‑safe concept depends on the identification of a safe state for all process variables. The value "0" (de-energized) represents this safe state for digital fail‑safe modules. This applies to both sensors and actuators.
  • Page 906 Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics 6.1 Reactions to faults Timeout of the PROFIsafe message (F-monitoring time exceeded) passivates all module channels. Table 2-303  Module signal type and passivation result Module signal type Passivation result Fail‑safe digital inputs • Tests are evaluated per channel, in order to allow channel- granular passivation of defective inputs.
  • Page 907 Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics 6.1 Reactions to faults Reintegration after high stress events High temperature, high voltage, or excessive current stress can damage electronics, reducing the reliability while components continue to work apparently as expected. Passivation does not remove the potentially damaging effects of high ambient temperature or high applied voltage.

  • Page 908: Fault Diagnostics Overview

    For further information about fail‑safe module access, refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming, Programming and Operating Manual on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/54110126). Fault diagnostics overview Diagnostics detect faults that can affect the integrity of safety-related I/O. The faults can be in the fail-safe module, communication with the CPU, or external circuits.

  • Page 909: Diagnostics Performed At Startup

    Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics 6.3 Diagnostics performed at startup In the presence of single faults, diagnostic messages may fail to be delivered, or the numerical event ID or text message can be wrong. You should not rely solely on the presence, absence, or content of diagnostic reports to make safety decisions. WARNING Diagnostic and status reports through LEDs and text messages are subject to single point failure errors.

  • Page 910: Diagnostics By Led Display

    Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics 6.4 Diagnostics by LED display Diagnostics by LED display 6.4.1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail-Safe module: ① Diagnostic status (DIAG (red/green)) ② Channel status and channel error (red/green) for each channel (F-DI 0 - 3, F-DQ 0 and 1) ③...
  • Page 911 Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics 6.4 Diagnostics by LED display Meaning of the LEDs The following tables set out the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in section Fault types, causes, and corrective measures (Page 1031).
  • Page 912 Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics 6.4 Diagnostics by LED display Channel LED for 1oo1 input channels Table 2-306  Meaning of the channel LED for 1oo1 input channels DIAGInput LEDs Meaning Process signal = 0 Process signal = 1 On green Channel fault or module fault affecting the channel On red Fault resolved, awaiting reintegration Alternately Flashes...

  • Page 913: Fault Types, Causes, And Corrective Measures

    Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics 6.5 Fault types, causes, and corrective measures Fault types, causes, and corrective measures The "Fault types, causes, and corrective measures" table below lists the messages of the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module. These messages are displayed in the TIA Portal under "Online &...
  • Page 914 Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics 6.5 Fault types, causes, and corrective measures Event ID Diagnostic F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Description Possible causes Corrective measures message Fail‑Safe module 16x0010 Parameterization Module When the module • i-Parameter CRC Correct the parameter failure (invalid receives new paramet­ error assignment parameters) ers, the module checks •...
  • Page 915 Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics 6.5 Fault types, causes, and corrective measures Event ID Diagnostic F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Description Possible causes Corrective measures message Fail‑Safe module 16x0042 Safety source Module The PROFIsafe driver has • eCoding plug has • Reassign the address not valid detected a source been replaced with a PROFIsafe F (F_Source_Add)
  • Page 916 Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics 6.5 Fault types, causes, and corrective measures Event ID Diagnostic F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Description Possible causes Corrective measures message Fail‑Safe module 16x0100 Module is defective Module Fatal internal error Fail-safe module is Replace the fail-safe defective module 16x0103 Watchdog tripped Module The watchdog timer in Fail-safe module is Replace the fail-safe...
  • Page 917 Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics 6.5 Fault types, causes, and corrective measures Event ID Diagnostic F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Description Possible causes Corrective measures message Fail‑Safe module 16x0302 Discrepancy fail­ F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 External discrepancy • Short-circuit • Check the wiring ure, channel state digital inputs failure: Channel state •...
  • Page 918 Interrupts/diagnostic messages/diagnostics 6.5 Fault types, causes, and corrective measures Event ID Diagnostic F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Description Possible causes Corrective measures message Fail‑Safe module 16x0313 Failure in the input F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Internal fault at the read • The module digital • If intermittent, it is circuit digital inputs circuit/test circuit...

  • Page 919: Technical Specifications

    Technical specifications Specifications 6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0 General information Product type designation F-DI 4+F-DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12 HW functional status FS01 Firmware version V1.0.x Product function I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated as of ver­ Step 7 V17 or higher sion Operating mode Supply voltage...
  • Page 920 Technical specifications 7.1 Specifications 6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0 Power loss Power loss, typ. 4,7 W Digital inputs Number of digital inputs Input characteristic according to IEC 61131 Type 1 Number of simultaneously controllable inputs all mounting positions up to 55 °C, max. Input voltage Rated value (DC) 24 V for signal "0"...
  • Page 921 Technical specifications 7.1 Specifications 6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0 for signal "1" rated value for signal "0" residual current, max. 0,5 mA Switching frequency with resistive load, max. 30 Hz with inductive load, max. 0,1 Hz on lamp load, max. 10 Hz Total current of the outputs Current per group, max.
  • Page 922 Technical specifications 7.1 Specifications 6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0 Category according to ISO 13849-1 Cat. 3 (DI single-channel), Cat. 4 (DI two-channel, SIL acc. to IEC 61508 SIL 2 (DI single-channel), SIL 3 (DI two-channel, Probability of failure (for service life of 20 years and repair time of 100 hours) Low demand mode: PFDavg in accordance with <...

  • Page 923: Dimension Drawing

    Dimension drawing Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module in front and side views. The dimensions are in mm. Figure 2-188  Dimension drawing Digital I/O module F-DI 4+F-DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12 (6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0) 1040 Equipment Manual, V1.0, 03/2022, A5E51082342-AB...

  • Page 924: Response Times

    You can calculate your maximum system response time using the "SIMATIC STEP 7 Safety Advanced: F‑Execution Times, F‑Runtimes, F‑Monitoring and Reaction Times (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/133100))" Excel file (RT_calculator). Use your configured individual fail-safe module timing parameters and the module characteristic parameters found in this appendix to determine the maximum response time of your system.

  • Page 925: Response Time Parameters For The F-Di 4/F-Dq 2 Digital Inputs

    Response times 9.2 Response time parameters for the F-DI 4/F-DQ 2 digital inputs Response time parameters for the F-DI 4/F-DQ 2 digital inputs Maximum Device Acknowledge Response Time of the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module digital inputs 1oo1 evaluation: + 2 x T WCDT_i filter cycle...

  • Page 926: Response Time Parameters For The F-Di 4/F-Dq 2 Digital Outputs

    Response times 9.3 Response time parameters for the F-DI 4/F-DQ 2 digital outputs Response time parameters for the F-DI 4/F-DQ 2 digital outputs Maximum response time of the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module digital outputs + MAX (T ) + 2 x T WCDT_q rb_swon cycle...

  • Page 927: Switching Of Loads

    Switching of loads 10.1 Connecting capacitive loads If an F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module is interconnected with loads that require little current and have capacitance, this can lead to detection of a short circuit or overload. Reason: The capacitance cannot be sufficiently discharged or charged during the configured readback time of the bit pattern test.

  • Page 928: Switching Of Inductive Loads

    Switching of loads 10.2 Switching of inductive loads 10.2 Switching of inductive loads The diagram below shows the maximum permitted inductive load and switching frequency allowed using only the internal suppression circuits of the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module digital outputs. You should equip larger or more frequently switched inductive loads with external suppression circuits to avoid early failure of the F‑DI 4/F‑DQ 2 Fail‑Safe module digital output switch.
  • Page 929 Update V1.0.1 Product Information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement – and continuously maintain –...
  • Page 930 ET 200AL model Description Article number ET 200AL F-IO ET200AL F-DI 4+F-DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0 4xM12 Product Information 1047 A5E51777384-AB, V1.0, 02/2022...
  • Page 931 Product Information Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks. In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement – and continuously maintain –...
  • Page 932 Increase the PROFINET update time of F‑host and IM for the duration of the PROFIsafe address assignment. S7-FCT, in conjunction with a GSDML file, allows you to configure selected F‑I/Os from Siemens in versions of STEP 7 that do not natively support the F-I/O and in an engineering system from another manufacturer.
  • Page 933 4+F-DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12". Select PROFIsafe V2.4 or PROFIsafe V2.6 based upon the specifications of your fail-safe controller. If you are using Siemens fail-safe controllers, select PROFIsafe V2.4 if you are using an S7‑300 or S7‑400 F‑CPU or select PROFIsafe V2.6 if you are using an S7‑1200 or S7‑1500 F‑CPU.
  • Page 934 – If asked, choose and confirm the desired communication interface. NOTE Refer to the SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/54110126) for further information about PROFIsafe address identification and assignment. Dependencies ET 200AL F-DI 4+F-DQ 2x24VDC/2A, 4xM12 (6ES7146-5FF00-0BA0) as of firmware version V1.0.0 or...
  • Page 935 Edition 11/2023 FUNCTION MANUAL SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200AL, ET 200pro, ET 200eco PN Diagnostics support.industry.siemens.com...
  • Page 936 Introduction Safety instructions Overview of system SIMATIC diagnostics S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200AL, ET 200pro, ET 200eco PN Quick start Diagnostics Setting and determining system diagnostics Function Manual System diagnostics by means of the user program Alarms Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system 11/2023 A5E03735838-AH...
  • Page 938 Table of contents Introduction..........................1058,2067 Function Manuals documentation guide................1061 1.1.1 Information classes Function Manuals................1061 1.1.2 Basic tools........................1063 1.1.3 SIMATIC Technical Documentation................... 1065 Safety instructions..........................1067 Cybersecurity information....................1067 Overview of system diagnostics......................1068 Properties of system diagnostics..................545 Benefits of innovative system diagnostics................

  • Page 939: Ethernet/Ip

    Table of contents System diagnostics by means of the user program................1126 Options of system diagnostics in the user program............1126 System diagnostics using process image inputs..............1128 Alarms............................... 1131 Creating alarms with the "Program_Alarm" instruction............. 1132 Editing alarms in the alarm editor..................1134 Display of program alarms....................

  • Page 940: Introduction

    Introduction Purpose of the documentation This Function Manual provides an overview of the diagnostics options for the SIMATIC S7‑1500 automation system, for 1513pro-2 PN and 1516pro‑2 PN CPUs based on SIMATIC S7‑1500, and for the SIMATIC ET 200MP, ET 200SP, ET 200AL and ET 200eco PN distributed I/O systems. The documentation covers the following: •...
  • Page 941 SIMATIC S7‑1500 automation system System Manual S7‑1500R/H redundant sys­ are implemented for the S7‑1500R/H (https://support.industry. siemens. redundant system. com/cs/ww/en/view/109754833) What's new in the Diagnostics function manual, Edition 09/2016 compared to Edition 06/2014 What's new? What are the customer benefits? Where can I find the informa­...
  • Page 942 Industry Mall The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP).

  • Page 943: Function Manuals Documentation Guide

    ET 200SP, ET 200AL and ET 200eco PN distributed I/O systems is arranged into three areas. This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require. You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742705). Basic information The system manuals and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7‑1500, SIMATIC Drive Controller, ET 200MP,...
  • Page 944 • SIMATIC Drive Controller (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/109772684/en) • Motion Control (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/109794046/en) • ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/73021864) • ET 200eco PN (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109765611) Manual Collections The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in one file. You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet: •...

  • Page 945: Basic Tools

    With the TIA Selection Tool , you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration. You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109767888) SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to perform commissioning and maintenance activities on various SIMATIC S7 stations as bulk operations independent of TIA Portal.
  • Page 946 You can find SIEMENS PRONETA Basic on the Internet: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624) SIEMENS PRONETA Professional is a licensed product that offers you additional functions. It offers you simple asset management in PROFINET networks and supports operators of automation systems in automatic data collection/acquisition of the components used through various functions: •...

  • Page 947: Simatic Technical Documentation

    Online Support: Industry Online Support International https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742705 Watch this short video to find out where you can find the overview directly in Siemens Industry Online Support and how to use Siemens Industry Online Support on your mobile device: Quick introduction to the technical documentation of automation products per video ( https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/109780491...
  • Page 948 Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates • Product master data You can find "mySupport" on the Internet. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en) Application examples The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system - separated from the focus on individual products.

  • Page 949: Safety Instructions

    Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to cyber threats.

  • Page 950: Overview Of System Diagnostics

    Overview of system diagnostics Properties of system diagnostics Introduction In the SIMATIC environment, the term "system diagnostics" refers to diagnostics of devices and modules. All SIMATIC products have integrated diagnostic functions that you can use to detect and remedy faults. The components automatically flag a potential fault in the operation and provide detailed information.

  • Page 951: 3.1 Properties Of System Diagnostics

    Overview of system diagnostics 3.1 Properties of system diagnostics Consistent diagnostics from the field level all the way to the management level The various diagnostics media give you a uniform view of maintenance-related information of every automation component in the plant: System status (module and network status, alarms for system errors) are available plant-wide in a uniform display.

  • Page 952: Benefits Of Innovative System Diagnostics

    Overview of system diagnostics 3.2 Benefits of innovative system diagnostics Benefits of innovative system diagnostics System diagnostics is also possible in STOP The system diagnostics is integrated in the firmware of the CPU and works independently of the cyclic user program. This means it is also available in the STOP CPU operating mode. Faults are detected immediately and signaled to the higher-level HMI devices, the Web server and the display of the SIMATIC S7‑1500 CPU, even in STOP mode.

  • Page 953: Quick Start

    Quick start Introduction The following chapters of this documentation describe the different options for establishing system diagnostics. All described options can be used independently of one another. This chapter gives you an overview of the basic procedure to get initial diagnostics information fast.
  • Page 954 Quick start 4.1 Using the display of the CPU Result The diagnostics events are displayed in the diagnostics buffer in the sequence in which they occur. Figure 3-4  Display of the diagnostics buffer in the display of the SIMATIC S7‑1500 CPU NOTE Automatic updating of diagnostics information You set automatic updating of the diagnostics information under: "Display"...

  • Page 955: Using Step 7

    Quick start 4.2 Using STEP 7 Using STEP 7 Getting started with STEP 7 gives you fast access to detailed diagnostics information. Requirements • A project has been created. • The project has been downloaded to the CPU. • An error has occurred. •...
  • Page 956 Quick start 4.2 Using STEP 7 7. The "Go online" dialog opens. Figure 3-6  Establishing an online connection 8. Make the settings for the interface. Diagnostics 1073 Function Manual, 11/2023, A5E03735838-AH...
  • Page 957 Quick start 4.2 Using STEP 7 9. Click on the "Go online" button. The project view of STEP 7 opens. The network view is opened in the work area. The symbols in the project tree provide initial information about the faulty modules. Figure 3-7  Display of the fault in the network view Diagnostics 1074...
  • Page 958 Quick start 4.2 Using STEP 7 10. Double-click the device which displays an alarm message to access the faulty module directly. This is the CPU in the example. The device view of the CPU is opened in the work area. In this view you can see directly in which module the error has occurred.
  • Page 959 Quick start 4.2 Using STEP 7 Result The link in the "Details" table column takes you to the online and diagnostics view of the device and to the diagnostics buffer there, for example. This includes more information on all diagnostics events in the order in which they occurred. Figure 3-9  Diagnostics buffer with detailed error description NOTE Symbols and their meaning...

  • Page 960: Setting And Determining System Diagnostics

    Setting and determining system diagnostics Introduction System diagnostics is generally available for the devices of the SIMATIC series. In the properties of each individual CPU, you can specify if you want to receive alarms for system diagnostics on your display device. Alarms are provided on the display of the SIMATIC S7‑1500 CPU, the CPU Web server and the HMI device.

  • Page 961: Configuring Alarms For System Diagnostics

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.1 Configuring alarms for system diagnostics Configuring alarms for system diagnostics Predefined alarm texts are available for establishing the system diagnostics. Requirements • STEP 7 is open. • A project is open. Procedure To make alarm settings for system diagnostics of the project in STEP 7, follow these steps: 1.

  • Page 962: Options For Displaying System Diagnostics

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Result You have configured the alarms for system diagnostics of the project in STEP 7. The settings are saved with the project and become effective after the compiling and downloading of the hardware configuration to the involved components. Maintenance events (maintenance demanded, maintenance required) are entered in the alarm buffer of the CPU just like any other event.

  • Page 963: Diagnostics Information At The Devices

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 5.2.1 Diagnostics information at the devices 5.2.1.1 LEDs Overview All hardware components, such as CPUs, interface modules and modules, provide information about their operating mode as well as internal and external errors through their LEDs.

  • Page 964: Display Of The Cpu

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Additional information The meaning of the individual LED displays, their different combinations and the remedial measures resulting from them in case of errors are device-specific. The explanation can be found in the manuals of the modules.

  • Page 965: Diagnostics Information In Step 7

    For additional information on the topic "Functions and operation of the display of the SIMATIC S7‑1500 CPU", see the documentation for the S7-1500 automation system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792). You can find detailed information on the individual options, a training course and a...
  • Page 966 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Symbol Meaning Diagnostics data is not available because the current online configuration data differ from the offline configuration data. The configured module or device and the module or device actually present are incompatible (valid for modules or devices under a CPU).

  • Page 967: Accessible Devices (Without Project)

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Event table The following information is displayed in the table for each diagnostics event: • Sequential number of the entry The first entry contains the latest event. • Date and time of the diagnostics event If no date and time are shown, the module has no integrated clock.
  • Page 968 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Procedure To display diagnostic information for specific devices even without an offline project, follow these steps: 1. Establish a connection to the respective CPU. 2. Select the command "Accessible devices" from the "Online" menu. The "Accessible devices"...

  • Page 969: Devices & Networks

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Result The device is displayed in the project tree. You open the diagnostic information in the work area with a double-click on "Online & Diagnostics". Information is available on the diagnostic status, cycle times, memory usage and the diagnostics buffer.
  • Page 970 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Procedure To get an overview of the current state of your automation system, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Network view" in the working area. 2. Select the CPU. 3.

  • Page 971: Online & Diagnostics

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Result The connected devices are now displayed with diagnostic information in the network view in the working area. Here you get an overview of the current state of your automation device. Figure 3-16  CPU with diagnostic information You get to the "Device view"...
  • Page 972 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics • Functions – Assign IP address – Set time and date of the CPU – Firmware update (e.g. for PLC, display) – Assign device name – Reset to factory settings –...
  • Page 973 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Procedure To display an overview of the faulty devices, follow these steps: 1. Select the affected device folder in the project tree. 2. Select the shortcut menu command "Online & Diagnostics". The online and diagnostics view of the module to be diagnosed is started.

  • Page 974: Diagnostics" Tab In The Inspector Window

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 5.2.2.5 "Diagnostics" tab in the Inspector window "Diagnostics" tab in the Inspector window The "Diagnostics" tab of the Inspector window includes information on diagnostics events and configured alarm events. Figure 3-19  Diagnostics in the Inspector window, "Device information"...
  • Page 975 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Subordinate "Connection information" tab The "Connection information" tab displays detailed diagnostics information for connections. There will only be information on the "Connection information" tab if there is an active online connection to at least one end point of the relevant connection.

  • Page 976: Cpu Diagnostics Buffer

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 3. To connect online with the respective CPU, select the shortcut menu command "Go online". 4. Select the required CPU once again in the project tree and select the shortcut menu command "Receive alarms".
  • Page 977 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Procedure To display the diagnostics buffer of a CPU in STEP 7, follow these steps: 1. Select the respective CPU. 2. Select the shortcut menu command "Online & Diagnostics". The "Online access" view is opened in the work area. Figure 3-23  Setting up online access 3.
  • Page 978 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 5. Select the area "Diagnostics buffer". Figure 3-24  Diagnostics buffer in STEP 7 NOTE Filtering events You can filter the entries in the diagnostics buffer in the settings of the "Diagnostics buffer"...

  • Page 979: Online Tools" Task Card

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Configuring a group alarm for security events To configure group alarms for security events, follow these steps: 1. Click on the CPU icon in the network view. The properties of the CPU are displayed in the Inspector window. 2.
  • Page 980 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics • The "Memory" pane contains the current memory usage of the associated CPU. The free memory is shown both as a bar graph and as a numerical value (percentage). The display for "Load memory"...

  • Page 981: Configuring The Settings For I/O Modules In Step 7

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 5.2.2.8 Configuring the settings for I/O modules in STEP 7 You can also make settings for system diagnostics in STEP 7 for I/O modules. The parameters you have to configure depend on the I/O module. The settings are optional.

  • Page 982: Diagnostics Information Using The Web Server

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Additional information The documentation for the respective module includes additional information on parameter assignment of I/O modules. 5.2.3 Diagnostics information using the web server System diagnostics using the CPU Web server The CPUs of the SIMATIC series have an integrated Web server and let you display the system diagnostics information by means of PROFINET.
  • Page 983 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics The following diagnostics options are available with the integrated Web server: • Start page with general CPU information • Information on diagnostics • Contents of the diagnostics buffer • Module information •...
  • Page 984 Entity certificate), "Public Key Infrastructure" (PKI) and certificate management can be found in the Communication function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192925) and in the online help for STEP 7, keyword "Secure communication". 7. Automatic updating is activated in the default setting of a configured CPU.
  • Page 985 "Download certificate". You can find instructions for installing the certificate in the help system of your Web browser and in the FAQ with the entry ID 103528224 at the Service&Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/103528224) website. 5. Click the NEXT link to go to the Web server pages.
  • Page 986 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Diagnostics Identification Program protection Memory Runtime information Fail-safe Identification Plant designation: Benutzer_AKZ Location identifier: Benutzer_OKZ Serial number: S C-V7B771082007 Order number: Hardware: 6ES7516-3AN01-0AB0 Version: Hardware: Firmware: V2.0.0 Bootloader: V2.2.1 Figure 3-29  Web server, "Diagnostics"...
  • Page 987 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Diagnostics option "Module information" The status of a device is indicated by the Web browser with symbols and comments on the "Module information" Web page. Modules are displayed on the "Module information" Web page in the "Name" column with a link.
  • Page 988 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Diagnostics option "Communication" The "Communication" web page provides detailed information about the following tabs: • Parameter A summary of the information on the PROFINET and Ethernet interfaces of the selected CPU is available in this tab.
  • Page 989 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics "Topology" diagnostics option The "Topology" Web page provides information on the topological configuration and status of the PROFINET devices in your PROFINET IO system. Topology Graphic view Table view Status overview Port Partner port...
  • Page 990 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Figure 3-35  Web server, "Motion Control diagnostics" webpage Diagnostics 1107 Function Manual, 11/2023, A5E03735838-AH...
  • Page 991 Additional information Additional information on the topic is available in the Web server function manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560). You can find additional information on the trace function in the Using the trace and logic analyzer function (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/64897128) function manual. Diagnostics 1108 Function Manual, 11/2023, A5E03735838-AH...

  • Page 992: Showing Diagnostic Information On An Hmi Device

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 5.2.4 Showing diagnostic information on an HMI device Components and objects for system diagnostics You can use the functionality of system diagnostics via HMI devices with the following components: •...

  • Page 993: Configuring System Diagnostics

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics System diagnostics window The system diagnostics window is an operating element and display object. The functions of the system diagnostics window are the same as for the system diagnostics view.
  • Page 994 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 4. Enable the columns that you require in the device view for WinCC Runtime, for example: – Operating mode – Slot – Type – Article number – Address The "Status" and "Name" columns are enabled by default and cannot be deselected. 5.

  • Page 995: Different Views Of The System Diagnostics View

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 5.2.4.2 Different views of the system diagnostics view Introduction The following views are available in the system diagnostics view and the system diagnostics window in WinCC Runtime: • Diagnostic overview •...
  • Page 996 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Device view The device view shows all the available devices of a layer in a table. Double-clicking on a device opens either the lower-level devices or the details view. The symbols in the first column provide information about the current state of the device.
  • Page 997 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Details view The details view gives detailed information about the selected device. Check whether the data is correct in the details view. The error text shows a detailed description of the pending errors and suggestions on resolving the errors.
  • Page 998 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Distributed I/O view The distributed I/O view is only available for distributed I/O systems. The distributed I/O view shows the status of the devices of the PROFIBUS/PROFINET-subnet. Each element in the view shows the following information: •...

  • Page 999: Inserting System Diagnostics Indicator

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Navigation buttons Button Function Opens the diagnostic overview. Opens the higher-level device, or the device view if there is no higher- level device. Opens the lower-level devices, or the details view if there are no lower- level devices.
  • Page 1000 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Procedure 1. Select the "DiagnosticsIndicator" object in the global library. 2. Drag-and-drop the library object to the position in the open screen where you want to insert the object. The library object is added.

  • Page 1001: Configuring Button As System Diagnostics Indicator

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Configuring access protection for the system diagnostics window Configure access protection for the system diagnostics indicator to prevent unauthorized access to the system diagnostics window. 1. Select the "DiagnosticsIndicator" object in the screen. 2.
  • Page 1002 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 11. Add the settings as follows: – Next to "Screen name", select the screen in which the system diagnostics view was created. – Select the system diagnostics view next to "Screen object". 12.

  • Page 1003: System Diagnostics In Wincc Unified

    Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 5.2.4.5 System diagnostics in WinCC Unified Objects for system diagnostics in WinCC Unified The following diagnostics objects are available to display system diagnostics on WinCC Unified components: • Diagnostics indicator •...
  • Page 1004 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics To configure a diagnostics indicator in an open screen, follow these steps: 1. Open the "Toolbox" task card. 2. Select the "IndustryGraphicLibrary > SIMATIC > SystemDiagnostic" folder in the "Dynamic widgets"...
  • Page 1005 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics 6. Select the "@DiagnosticsIndicatorTag" in the "Process" area. Figure 3-46  Configuring a diagnostics indicator Result: You have configured a diagnostics indicator and dynamized the status using a tag. The colors of the dynamized SVGs change according to the defined tag values in Runtime. Table 3-7  Possible diagnostic values Status Diagnostic value...
  • Page 1006 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics Configuring the system diagnostics view You configure the system diagnostics view in WinCC Unified in the same way as in WinCC. However, while system diagnostics in WinCC shows each view in table form, WinCC Unified has a matrix view.
  • Page 1007 Setting and determining system diagnostics 5.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics In the matrix view, you can switch to the diagnostics view with the "Show diagnostics buffer" button. The diagnostics view shows the diagnostics buffer with the diagnostic events of the selected CPU.

  • Page 1008: System Diagnostics By Means Of The User Program

    System diagnostics by means of the user program Options of system diagnostics in the user program Introduction You can configure responses to diagnostics alarms in the user program. You can, for example, specify that your plant is stopped in case of specific diagnostics alarms. Instructions A vendor-independent structure of data records with diagnostics information applies.
  • Page 1009 • PROFINET function manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) • From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/19289930) programming manual • Manual for the respective module Application examples You can find detailed application examples with further documentation and example projects on the Service&Support Website:...

  • Page 1010: System Diagnostics Using Process Image Inputs

    System diagnostics by means of the user program 6.2 System diagnostics using process image inputs System diagnostics using process image inputs Introduction In addition to event-driven system diagnostics, the input and output modules of the SIMATIC series provide diagnostics information using the process image input. The system diagnostics described in the preceding sections is made available asynchronously to the program processing.
  • Page 1011 System diagnostics by means of the user program 6.2 System diagnostics using process image inputs Evaluation of the value status If you have enabled the value status for an I/O module, this module provides additional information on the value status in addition to the user data. This information is available directly in the process image input and can be retrieved with simple binary operations without having the evaluate the module diagnostics.
  • Page 1012 System diagnostics by means of the user program 6.2 System diagnostics using process image inputs Example - Evaluation of the value status for the input channel of an analog input module The example below shows the basic evaluation of the value status for the input channel of an analog input module in the user program.

  • Page 1013: Alarms

    Alarms Introduction Alarms allow you to display events from processing in the automation system and to quickly detect errors, to precisely localize them and to remove them. Downtimes are significantly reduced in a plant. Before alarms can be output, they need to be configured. You can create, edit and compile event-dependent alarms along with their alarm texts and alarm attributes and display them on display devices.

  • Page 1014: Creating Alarms With The "Program_Alarm" Instruction

    Alarms 7.1 Creating alarms with the "Program_Alarm" instruction Creating alarms with the "Program_Alarm" instruction "Program_Alarm" instruction You create a program alarm in STEP 7 with the "Program_Alarm" instruction. The figure below shows the "Program_Alarm" instruction with the most important input tags. ①...
  • Page 1015 Alarms 7.1 Creating alarms with the "Program_Alarm" instruction NOTE The "Program_Alarm" instruction can only be called in a function block. A program alarm can be up to 256 bytes long in total (with associated values and texts from the text list). The associated values can be a maximum of 512 bytes in length.

  • Page 1016: Editing Alarms In The Alarm Editor

    Alarms 7.2 Editing alarms in the alarm editor Editing alarms in the alarm editor Introduction You can edit the created alarms in STEP 7 either in the program editor or in the alarm editor. You can find additional information on editing alarms in the program editor in the STEP 7 online help under "Creating and editing alarms".
  • Page 1017 Alarms 7.2 Editing alarms in the alarm editor ③ "Type alarms" area: This is where the type alarms created in a function block with the "Program_Alarm" instruction are displayed. Type alarms serves as templates for instance alarms (④). All the inputs you make for the type alarm are automatically included in the instance alarms derived from it. You can find more information on type alarms in the STEP 7 online help under "Alarm types and alarms".

  • Page 1018: Display Of Program Alarms

    Alarms 7.3 Display of program alarms Display of program alarms Program alarms you create with the "Program_Alarm" instruction are automatically made available to the display devices. You have the following options to display the alarms: • STEP 7 • HMI •...

  • Page 1019: Output Of The Alarm State With The "Get_Alarmstate" Instruction

    Alarms 7.4 Output of the alarm state with the "Get_AlarmState" instruction Output of the alarm state with the "Get_AlarmState" instruction "Get_AlarmState" instruction The "Get_AlarmState" instruction outputs the alarm state of a program alarm. The output of the alarm state always refers to a program alarm that was created using the "Program_Alarm" instruction.

  • Page 1020: Example Program For Program Alarms

    Alarms 7.5 Example program for program alarms Example program for program alarms 7.5.1 Task Introduction This section describes the basic configuration of program alarms with the "Program_Alarm" instruction based on two examples. The two examples solve the same problem but use a different approach.
  • Page 1021 Alarms 7.5 Example program for program alarms Steps The following steps are necessary for this example: 1. Define tags for signal acquisition 2. Create function block 3. Create program alarms 4. Call function block 5. Edit alarm text Define tags for signal acquisition The following table shows the tags that are used in this example.

Table of Contents

Save PDF